JP7397457B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 below, various winning openings (starting opening, big winning opening, general winning opening) are provided in a gaming area where game balls can flow down. When game balls enter the various winning holes, prize balls are awarded to the player.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to execute a first special game in which the variable winning area changes to an open state,
During the execution of the first special game, if the game ball that has entered the variable winning area further enters the specific area, a second special game can be executed following the execution of the first special game. can be,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
If the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, then the game is controlled to be unplayable,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a notification effect to notify that a game ball can enter the specific area,
If the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number due to prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the variable winning area in the first special game, if the specific measurement number does not reach the reference number; It is characterized in that the notification effect is performed in a more conspicuous manner.

According to the present invention, it is possible to avoid awarding excessive prize balls to the player.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a front view showing the second grand prize winning device etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are in a standby state, and (B) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are activated. FIG. 3 is a front view of the unit. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view showing a 7-segment display. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to general drawings, and (B) is a table showing random numbers related to special drawings. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. This is a look-ahead determination table. This is a jackpot game control table. It is an explanatory diagram of a gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of production mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a passable notification effect, (B-1) is an explanatory view showing a first notification effect, and (B-2) is an explanatory view showing a second notification effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SP reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a hold effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a movable body effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of operation performance. It is a figure which shows the over-winning ball prevention function. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls. (A) is a diagram showing a performance mode in the case of an over-prize ball abnormality, and (B) is a diagram showing a performance mode in the case of a magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an over-prize ball preview image, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop preview image. (A) is a diagram in which a purple-rimmed image is displayed in a high-accuracy, high-base state, and (B) is a diagram in which a red-rimmed image is displayed in a high-accuracy, high-base state. (A) is a diagram showing when the special reset switch is pressed, and (B) is a diagram showing when one hour has elapsed in the customer waiting state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of effects related to passability notification effects and notification effects. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of input processing. It is a flowchart of difference ball number measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of output processing. It is a flowchart of outer end signal output processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1m timer interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart of 10m timer interrupt processing. It is a jackpot game control table according to the second embodiment. It is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table according to a second embodiment. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table according to a second embodiment. It is a table showing the distribution rate of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern according to the second embodiment. It is a table showing the distribution rate of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern according to the second embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of performance after reach using the same even number according to the second embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern change production concerning a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a promotion effect according to the second embodiment. It is a jackpot game control table according to the third embodiment. They are a jackpot determination table and a hit type determination table according to the third embodiment. It is a fluctuation pattern determination table based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows reach based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special reach based on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a right-handed hitting promotion effect according to a third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a passability notification effect in a special mode according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the passing notification effect in the example of a change. It is a figure which shows the notification effect in the example of a change. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in a modification. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls in a modification. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference number of balls is displayed on a 7 segment display in a modification. It is a figure explaining the maximum difference number of balls in a modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the counter in a modification in which an over-prize ball prevention function is activated based on the number of increased balls from the minimum difference ball number.

Embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In this specification, in order to simplify the description, by writing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc. for the symbols or codes may be omitted or May be abbreviated. Furthermore, in any flowchart described below, the execution order of a plurality of processes in any plurality of steps can be arbitrarily changed or executed in parallel within a range that does not cause inconsistency in the processing contents.

1. Structure of the gaming machine The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be explained. First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 5. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Furthermore, "front" is the direction from the pachinko machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko machine PY1, and "back" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko machine PY1 toward the pachinko machine PY1. shall be.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine frame 2 includes an outer frame 22 and a front door 23 that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 22. Further, the front door 23 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board unit YU to be described later is attached, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via a hinge 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 attached to the game board mounting frame 2A and the transparent plate 23t face each other. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor (gaming parlor), a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 visually recognizes the game area 6 formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. be able to. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) corresponds to the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball to make the game ball fire (the amount by which the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is being Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k. Further, a lower decorative body 36 that largely protrudes forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper tray 34 for storing game balls to be supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36. Further, a lower tray 35 is provided at the lower center of the front of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34.

An operable first input device (hereinafter referred to as "normal button") 40 is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . The normal button 40 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a gripping part, or the like. Further, an operable second input device (hereinafter referred to as "special button") 41 is provided on the right decorative body 32 that is formed to protrude forward from the right edge of the front frame 23m. The special button 41 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a gripping part, or the like.

Further, a speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 that is formed to protrude forward from the upper part of the surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 (sound output means) includes a left speaker 52L placed on the left side and a right speaker 52R placed on the right side. Further, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 in the front of the lower decorative body 36. Furthermore, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached above the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m as a performance device for the purpose of increasing game interest. The frame moving device 58 includes a left frame moving device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame moving device 58R arranged on the right side.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using mainly FIGS. 2 to 5. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a performance unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall 1B is formed to protrude forward and define a game area 6 through which game balls can flow. Further, on the outside of the inner wall portion 1B, a substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the gaming area 6 is formed to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a game area 6 is formed which is surrounded by an inner wall part 1B, an outer wall part 1C, etc. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is partitioned into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall 1B and the outer wall 1C.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nail enters the game area 6 and moves the game ball flowing down the game area 6 through a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first winning opening 14, which will be described later. And, a route is configured to appropriately guide the player to the second grand prize opening 15 and the like.

In the gaming area 6, there is a first starting winning device 11D in which a first starting opening 11 into which a game ball can enter is formed, and a second starting winning device 11D that makes it possible or impossible for the ball to enter the second starting opening 12. A device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided.

The first starting winning device 11D is immovable. Therefore, the ease with which game balls enter the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). Winning the game ball into the first starting hole 11 is achieved by drawing the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 1") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Figure 1, which will be described later: hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 1 Lottery"). ) and the variable display of special map 1. Furthermore, when the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D includes an operable electric tube opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position in which it is impossible or extremely difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 12. When the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can enter the second starting port 12. In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the "open state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D, and only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state, the game ball is moved to the second starting port 12. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the state in which the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. Further, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is opened", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

Winning a game ball into the second starting hole 12 is achieved by drawing a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 2") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Figure 2, which will be described later: hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 2 Lottery"). ) and the variable display of special map 2. Furthermore, when the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a general winning hole 10 into which game balls can enter. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. The passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the lottery of a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol") (that is, the acquisition and determination of a regular symbol random number: hereinafter referred to as "common symbol lottery") and the variable display of a regular symbol. It has become. The electric chew 12D is opened by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game that involves opening the electric chew 12D.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT14D") in which a first big winning opening 14 into which a game ball can enter is formed.

The first big prize winning device 14D includes a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can operate in an open state and a closed state. The first big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k. Normally, the AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state that closes the first big winning hole 14, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14. When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 14. In this way, the game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When a game ball enters the first grand prize opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a guiding stage 12g that guides the gaming ball to the second starting port 12. In addition, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide stage 12g can flow down toward the second starting port 12.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a second grand prize winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") in which a second grand prize opening 15 into which game balls can enter is formed. The second big prize winning device 15D includes an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second grand prize opening 15, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 15. The VAT opening/closing member 15k can take an open state. When the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 15. On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second grand prize opening 15 is also referred to as a "closed state". In this way, the second big prize opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When the game balls enter the second grand prize opening 15, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the second grand prize winning device 15D will be explained in detail using FIG. 3. Inside the second big winning device 15D, there is provided a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a that can detect the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 and allow the game ball to pass downward. It is being

A specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 through which game balls can pass (enter) are provided in the downstream area of the second big prize opening sensor 15a. The game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening sensor 15a are sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The sorting device 16D includes a sorting member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving the distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state (passage prevention state: the left end of the distribution member 16k when viewed from the front in FIG. 3(A) is located slightly to the right of the left end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific area 16 directly above it. When the distribution member 16k is in the first state, it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 to pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. It is difficult and passes through a non-specific area 17. The route of the game ball flowing down from this second big prize opening 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called a first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: in a front view of FIG. 3(B)) in which the game ball is allowed to pass (enter) the specific area 16. The left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the left of the right end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific area 16 directly above it, leaving the area directly above the specific area 16 open. When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from this second big prize opening 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Note that basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Then, only in a predetermined round game (for example, 10R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can change to the second state.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 are provided with a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detect the game ball that has passed through (entered) each area 16 and 17 and allow the game ball to pass downward. .

Note that it is possible to provide only one of the first grand prize device 14D and the second grand prize device 15D within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Furthermore, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 that can emit light.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game balls can flow down can be divided into a left game area (first game area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area is referred to as "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area is referred to as "right-handed hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the left hand is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the right hand. The possible flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, a first big winning port 14, and a second big winning port 15 are provided. Therefore, by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right, the player can pass through the gate 13, enter the second starting opening 12, the first big winning opening 14, or the second You can aim to win the big prize opening 15.

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, and second big winning hole 15), It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Further, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (a portion other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special figure 1 display 81a that variably displays special figure 1, a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays special figure 2, and a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays general figure 1. A general figure display 82 is included. In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 pending display 83a that displays the number of special figure 1 pending (U1: the number of variable displays of special figure 1 on the special figure 1 display 81a), which will be described later. Also included is a special figure 2 pending display 83b that displays the number of special figure 2 pending (U2: the number of reserved special figures 2 that is variablely displayed by the special figure 2 indicator 81b), which will be described later.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is held in response to the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 12. In addition, in the following explanation, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are collectively called the special drawing, and the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing are collectively called the special drawing drawing. Moreover, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure display 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display 83.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed variably and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure, special figure derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of types of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stopping special symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (a special symbol with a specific stopping pattern, that is, a jackpot symbol), the grand prize opening (the first grand prize opening 14 and the second grand prize opening 15) is opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is played.

The special figure display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), the special drawing display 81 will display "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, A jackpot symbol consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed, such as (: off). In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, the special drawing display 81 will display a losing pattern consisting of only the LED on the far right lighting up, such as "■■■■■■■□" do. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the manner of variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as when all LEDs flash at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific manner).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball hits the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, various random numbers (numerical information and judgment information) are generated for special drawing drawings, etc. example) may be obtained. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage unit 105, which will be described later, as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the various random numbers obtained by winning (balls entering) the game ball into the first starting port 11 are referred to as "special drawing 1 related random numbers", and the various random numbers obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12 The various random numbers obtained by (ball entry) are referred to as "special map 2 related random numbers." Here, the special figure 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figure 1 reservations) and the number of special figure 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figure 2 reservations). It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, 4). In addition, hereinafter, the special map 1 reservation and the special map 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special map reservation", and the number of special diagrams 1 and 2 reserved are collectively referred to as "the number of special diagrams reserved". In addition, the special figure 1 related random numbers and the special figure 2 related random numbers are collectively referred to as "special figure related random numbers."

In the pachinko game machine PY1, if the variable display of the special figure is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, specifically, while the variable display of the special figure is being executed. If a prize is won during execution of a jackpot game or a jackpot game, the variable display of the special drawing (or the right to draw the special drawing) for the winning can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 is consumed when variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, extinguishing the special figure reservation means determining the special figure related random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation and executing variable display of the special figure to show the determination result.

Then, the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation display 83. Each of the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special symbols reserved. Is possible.

In addition, the variable display of the general map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed variably and then stopped. The general map that is stopped and displayed (the stationary general map, the general map derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one general map selected from among a plurality of types of general maps by lottery. If the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure (ordinary figure with a predetermined stop mode, that is, a winning symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D) is opened. .

The common map display device 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the common map according to the result of the general map lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. When the result of the common symbol lottery is a win, the common symbol display 82 displays a winning symbol consisting of both LEDs lighting up, such as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). If the result of the lottery is a loss, a loss pattern such as "■□" consisting of only the right LED being lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is variablely displayed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of variable display of the ordinary map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of variable display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all LEDs blinking at once, unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a regular symbol random number (an example of numerical information or determination information) for performing a regular symbol lottery may be acquired. This random number is stored in the below-mentioned normal pattern holding storage section 106 on the condition that the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not executed. It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) to the number of general drawings that can be stored in the general drawing holding storage unit 106 (number of general drawings pending). In addition, below, the normal pattern random number acquired by the game ball passing through the gate 13 is also referred to as the "normal pattern related random number."

Next, the performance unit 1U attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained using FIG. The production unit 1U is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. The performance unit 1U is equipped with an image display device 50, a first board movable device (hereinafter referred to as "on board movable device") 55, and a second board movable device (hereinafter referred to as "bottom board movable device") 56.

The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, a dot display, a 7-segment display, etc., and includes a display screen 50a that can display patterns and the like.

The on-board movable device 55 is disposed in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k. The underboard movable device 56 is disposed in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated underboard movable body 56k.

FIG. 5A schematically shows how the above-panel movable body 55k and the under-panel movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not in operation. When the drive source of the above-board movable device 55 is driven, the above-board movable body 55k moves downward (down), and when the drive source of the under-board movable device 56 is driven, the under-board movable body 56k moves upward (raised). do. At this time, the image display device 50 is covered by the lowered on-board movable body 55k or the raised under-board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on FIGS. 6 to 9. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has various functions such as a special drawing lottery, a variable display of special drawings, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a general drawing drawing, a variable display of a general drawing, and auxiliary games. A game control board (hereinafter also referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls gaming profits (progress of the game), and game performances (special figure fluctuation performance, hold performance, jackpot game) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 A performance control board that controls performances such as a customer waiting performance, an operation promotion performance that prompts operations during the period when the operation of the normal button 40 and special button 41 is valid (operation valid period), hereinafter also referred to as a "sub control board" ) 120, a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc., are provided on the back side further than the image display device 50 of the game board 1 (see FIG. 8). The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. Further, the effect control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section that controls effects, together with an image control board 140, a lamp control circuit 151, and an audio control circuit 161, which will be described later. The production control unit includes at least a production control board 120, and controls game production using production means (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, etc.), It is sufficient if the waiting effect and the operation promotion effect can be controlled.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a power supply board 190. The power supply board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the production control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and also supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power supply board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 that can be pressed down. When the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 191 (specific operation means) clears game information stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the gaming control microcomputer 101 (described later) (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, the number of special symbols on hold). This is for clearing (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear"). As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on a power supply board 190 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the game parlor who can open and close the front door 23. That is, the RAM clear switch 191 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. In the first embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be provided on the main control board 100 or a dedicated board. It's okay to be left behind.

Further, the power supply board 190 is provided with a backup power supply circuit 192. The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 is retained even when the power is cut off to the pachinko game machine PY1. Further, a power switch 193 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON or OFF operation of the power switch 193 switches the power on or off. In addition, the main control board 100 may be provided with a backup power supply circuit for the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100, or the production control board 120 may be provided with a backup power supply circuit for the production RAM 124 of the production control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is equipped with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The gaming control microcomputer 101 includes a gaming ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the gaming, a gaming RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a gaming ROM 103 is included.

The gaming ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, which will be described later. , auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

The gaming RAM 104 is provided with the above-mentioned special symbol reservation storage section 105, regular symbol reservation storage section 106, and the like. Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage section 107, and the non-erasable storage section 107 is provided with a total prize ball number storage section 107a, a total fired ball number storage section 107b, and a difference ball number storage section 107c. It is being In the non-erasable storage section 107, even if RAM clear is executed, the gaming CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents. The non-erasable storage unit 107 (total award ball number storage unit 107a, total fired ball number storage unit 107b, difference ball number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) (see FIG. 8). As shown in FIG. 9, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and includes a total of 32 lighting (light-emitting) parts. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 includes, in order from left to right, a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting parts (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so that they can each represent numbers from "0" to "9". It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as an operating means when setting a setting value corresponding to the jackpot determination probability. The interior of the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotational position with a setting key (not shown) inserted therein. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine PY1, by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position and turning on the power while pressing and operating the RAM clear switch 191, the machine shifts to the setting mode where the setting value can be set. can do. In this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in this pachinko gaming machine PY1, only one type of setting value, "1", is provided. Therefore, the set value cannot be changed from "1". Note that when the setting mode is set, if the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode is ended and RAM clear is executed.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed down. As shown in FIG. 8, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 placed on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the gaming hall who can open and close the front door 23. That is, the special reset switch 181 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be explained in detail later. Furthermore, a gaming I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals is mounted on the main control board.

Various sensors MS and various actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting port sensor that detects game balls that have entered the first starting port 11, and a second sensor that detects game balls that have entered the second starting port 12. A starting hole sensor, a general winning hole sensor that detects the game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10, a gate sensor that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13, and a first sensor that detects the game ball that has entered the first large winning hole 14. A big winning hole sensor, a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15, a specific area sensor 16a that detects the game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16), Also included is a non-specific area sensor 17a that detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17).

Further, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor that detects all the game balls (total number of shot balls) flowing down the game area 6. Here, the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1 through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the lower part of the game board mounting frame 2. Therefore, the discharge port sensor is provided within the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor that detects illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects the magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally place game balls into various winning holes 10, 11, 12, and 14. When each of the above-mentioned sensors detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content.

Further, the various sensors MS include a front door open sensor that detects opening of the front door 23 to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor that detects opening of the front frame 23m to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content. When the front frame sensor detects the opening of the front frame 23m, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content. Note that the type and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid that drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D, and a solenoid that drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. It includes a first big winning opening solenoid, a second big winning opening solenoid that drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k of the sorting device 16D. . Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the main control board 100 is connected to displays 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for monitoring payout. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. The firing device 72 is also connected via the firing control circuit 175. Note that the firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 pays out prize balls using the prize ball payout device 73 and the rental ball payout device 74 based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. and pay out rental balls. The number of game balls to be paid out is output to the payout control board 170.

Further, the firing device 72 is provided with a touch switch that can detect the contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k (see FIG. 1). When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170. Further, the firing device 72 is connected to a firing volume knob that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing solenoid so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob. In the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160. That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. The external terminal board 160 is for transmitting an outer end signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to an external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the gaming status, and information indicating an error or fraud (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted by asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Furthermore, although the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, the main control board 100 may be connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

Further, the main control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the production control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the main control board 100 based on various commands sent from the main control board 100. The connection between the main control board 100 and the performance control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 100 and the production control board 120 as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the main control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123 that stores It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

Further, the performance ROM 123 stores programs for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, sub-side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Furthermore, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance I/O port section 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139. The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 operates on the power when the pachinko game machine PY1 is supplied with power from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power supply board 190 operates. It operates using power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided therein. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not turned on. Note that a backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the production control board 120. A circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (such as a button battery) can be used as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the production control board 120. The production control microcomputer 121 of the production control board 120 controls the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to control the image display device based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100. 50 display control is performed. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for expanding the image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It is equipped with Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured on one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50 image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display screen 50a.

Note that the display list is made up of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100. Output.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be used as a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various switches serving as input units, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the performance control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. Further, the effect control board 120 controls the lighting of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100.

Various switches connected to the production control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a and a special button detection switch 41a. The normal button detection switch 40a detects that the normal button 40 is pressed. The special button detection switch 41a detects that the special button 41 has been pressed. Each detection switch 40a, 41a outputs a signal according to the detected content to the production control board 120. Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators SA connected to the production control board 120 include motors that drive the above-board moving device 55, the below-board moving device 56, the frame moving device 58, etc., and drive the motors to drive each moving device. It is possible to perform a predetermined operation. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151. Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various lamps SL connected to the effect control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54, etc., and each lamp is made to emit light. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that a CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of each lamp and control the operation of each movable device. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM. Further, the type and number of lamps connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Main games played by the gaming machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 10 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a regular lottery when the fired game ball passes through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

Pachinko game machine PY1 acquires a random number related to a common pattern when a basic pattern fluctuation starting condition is satisfied when performing such a series of games (general pattern lottery, variable display of normal pattern, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 10(A), the acquired ordinary symbol-related random numbers include ordinary symbol random numbers. The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using one or more hit determination tables as shown in FIG. 11(A). The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. In other words, the gaming state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state, and the hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and the hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving It is possible to distinguish between the hit determination table) and the hit determination table. In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number values) are assigned to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, a normal pattern variation pattern is determined for variable display of the normal pattern. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, basically the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Furthermore, the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary figure fluctuation The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern using one or more ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination tables as shown in FIG. 11(B). The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table includes a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the short-time regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) and the short-time regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol (losing common symbol) is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is Regarding the variable display of ordinary figures in the case where the ordinary figures are stopped and displayed, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display of figures, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds. A variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. Further, these ordinary figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery).

The auxiliary game includes various elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components), such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a gaming state. Pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game based on the game state using one or more auxiliary game control tables as shown in FIG. 11(C). The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state. Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. Further, the number of openings and opening time for each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time (a time during which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 0.08 seconds)). Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a second opening time that is longer than the first opening time (a time during which it is easy to make the game ball enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 3.00 seconds)). Open. Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game".

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting slot 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbol 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, below, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

Pachinko game machine PY1 acquires a special pattern-related random number when a starting condition is established in order to play a series of games (special pattern drawing, variable display of special pattern, jackpot game, and setting of gaming state). Perform various judgments regarding random numbers. As shown in FIG. 10(B), the special pattern related random numbers to be obtained include special pattern random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot pattern type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number for determining reach. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Note that the random number is sometimes referred to as determination information.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot Judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) using one or more jackpot judgment tables as shown in FIG. 12(A). The gaming states include a normal probability state and a high probability state, and the jackpot determination table is associated with whether the game is in the normal probability state or the high probability state. That is, as a jackpot judgment table, it is possible to distinguish between a jackpot judgment table used in a normal probability state (normal probability jackpot judgment table) and a jackpot judgment table used in a high probability state (high probability jackpot judgment table). It is possible.

In each jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 12(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination In the jackpot symbol type determination, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type (jackpot symbol type) is determined by using one or more jackpot symbol type determination tables as shown in FIG. ). For each type of jackpot symbol, it is possible to associate the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot consisting of game benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is associated with the type of the special symbol that is variably displayed, in other words, the type of the starting opening where the prize was won due to the jackpot symbol type determination (which caused the jackpot symbol type determination to occur). is possible. That is, as the jackpot symbol type determination table, there is a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing the variable display of special figure 2. It is possible to distinguish between the symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot symbols, and in each jackpot symbol type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. There is. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. Further, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(B), the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol type based on the jackpot symbol type determination for special symbol 1 is set to 50% for jackpot symbol X and 50% for jackpot symbol Y, and for special symbol 2. It is possible for the jackpot symbol Z to make the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type 100% based on the jackpot symbol type determination. In this way, the jackpot symbol type is determined in the special drawing 1 lottery, which is held when a game ball enters the first starting opening 11, and the special drawing 2 drawing, which is held when a gaming ball enters the second starting opening 12. It is possible to have different fractions.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment Reach judgment determines whether or not to generate a reach with the special symbol variation effect described later, using one or more reach judgment tables as shown in FIG. 12(C) when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss. This is a judgment to determine whether

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the reach determination table is distinguished between a reach determination table used in a non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in a time saving state (time saving reach determination table). Is possible.

In each reach judgment table, the reach random number judgment value (random value of reach) is assigned to the reach judgment results "reach exists (reach occurs)" and "reach does not occur (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is a reach or no reach (whether or not to generate a reach). As shown in FIG. 12(C), the number of reach establishment random values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, "with reach (generates reach)", which is performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", is referred to as "loss with reach", and "without reach (does not cause reach)" is referred to as "loss with reach". )” is sometimes referred to as “no-reach loss.”

3-2-4. Special pattern fluctuation To determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern, use one or more special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables (special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) as shown in Figures 13 to 14 to determine the fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern (Special figure fluctuation pattern) This is a judgment to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern, and is carried out in both cases where the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot or a loss. The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can include identification information regarding the result of jackpot determination and the result of reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (performance content) of the special symbol variation performance. As the special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns each having different identification information, and the number thereof can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the type of special symbol that is variablely displayed as a determination target, in other words, the type of the starting opening where the winning is made due to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination. That is, as the special figure variation pattern judgment table, there is a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Fig. 13) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 14) that is sometimes used.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

Further, each special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state can be further associated with a jackpot determination result, a jackpot symbol type determination result, or a reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each include one for jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each include one for jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach loss can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. In addition, each special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for no-reach losing can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures. For example, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no reach loss that is used when the special pattern 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table is used when the special pattern 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss.

Then, the special figure display device 81 performs a variable display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Ru.

Further, each special figure variation pattern can be associated with a production flow of a special figure variation production as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 13 to 14.

Furthermore, as shown in the rightmost column of the tables in Figures 13 and 14, names can be attached to the special figure fluctuation patterns in association with the special figure (jackpot determination result) and the content of the special figure fluctuation effect. be. For example, a special pattern fluctuation pattern related to a jackpot is called a "jackpot fluctuation." On the other hand, a special pattern fluctuation pattern in which SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed in a loss with reach is called "SP loss fluctuation", and a special pattern in which L reach, which is a type of reach, is performed in loss with reach. The figure variation pattern is called "L loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern in which the special figure variation effect ends with N reach, which is a type of reach, is called "N loss variation", which is a loss with reach and no reach. Such a special pattern variation pattern is referred to as a "normal loss variation."

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination Pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs pre-reading determination using one or more pre-reading determination tables as shown in FIG. 15, based on the acquired special figure related random numbers. The look-ahead determination includes, for example, determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, determining which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined to be in the jackpot symbol type determination, and determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot symbol type determination. There is a determination as to which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined to be in the special figure variation pattern determination. The pre-reading determination table can be associated with the type of starting opening related to the starting prize. That is, as the pre-reading determination table, there is a pre-reading determination table (first pre-reading determination table) when a prize is won in the first starting opening 11, and a pre-reading determining table (second pre-reading determination table) when winning in the second starting opening 12. , it is possible to distinguish between

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. That is, the look-ahead determination table is distinguished between a look-ahead decision table used in a non-time-saving state (non-time-saving look-ahead decision table) and a look-ahead decision table used in a time-saving state (time-saving look-ahead decision table). Is possible.

In other words, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead decision table used in the non-time saving state, a first look-ahead decision table used in the time save state, and a second look-ahead decision table used in the non-time save state. It is possible to distinguish between the second prefetch determination table used in the time saving state and the second prefetch determination table used in the time saving state. Note that what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination can be changed as appropriate.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be explained. A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and a round game from the start of the jackpot until the start of the first round. It includes an opening (also written as OP) and an ending (also written as ED) from the end of the final round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending. Furthermore, it is possible to not provide OP and ED. Note that hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)," and the 10th round game is called "10 rounds (10R)."

The elements constituting such a jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 14 or second big winning hole 15) in each round game, Includes the type and opening time of each opening (opening pattern), the time to be closed until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). ing. After the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using one or more jackpot game control tables as shown in FIG. The jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game. As the jackpot game, it is possible to control one or more types of jackpot games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16, from 1R to 9R, the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. An open round game will be played. In 10R (final round), a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds is played. It will be done. In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are detected by the big winning hole sensor, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning holes 14 and 15 has elapsed, End the round game.

Further, the number of times and time for each element can be changed as appropriate. Further, the jackpot game can be played using both the first big winning hole 14 and the second big winning hole 15, or only one of them.

Here, the specific area 16 will be explained in detail. The specific area 16 has a closed state in which prizes cannot be won and an open state in which prizes can be won by the distribution member 16k, so the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening and closing mode of the specific area 16. In the following, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k will also be referred to as the "opening/closing mode of the specific area 16." In this way, the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operating manner (the specific area 16 is opened and closed in a constant manner); In combination with the opening/closing mode of the second big prize opening 15 in the jackpot game, the difficulty (ease) of letting the game ball enter the specific area 16 in the jackpot game is set. Note that, hereinafter, the state in which the specific region 16 is in an open state is also referred to as "V open".

For 15 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening starts, the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)). Therefore, in a round game in which the second big prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big prize opening 15, the time and the period during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. From the relationship with the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in a round game in which the second big winning hole 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big winning hole 15, and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. Due to the relationship with timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). In this way, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening/closing member is used in the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that allows the game ball to easily pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"). The VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a jackpot game in which the game ball 15k and the distribution member 16k operate, and in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. It is possible to execute a jackpot game. A jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V-long opening pattern in this way is called a "V-long jackpot." On the other hand, a jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a V-short opening pattern is referred to as a "V-short jackpot".

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state", "high probability high base gaming state", and " It is possible to set the game state to any one of the "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability low base state", "low probability high base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "high probability". The "low base state" and the "high probability high base gaming state" can be respectively abbreviated as the "high probability high base state." The gaming states include a state related to the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" in the jackpot determination, and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state.

The normal probability state is set in the "low probability low base gaming state" or the "low probability high base gaming state", and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is the normal probability. The high probability state is set in the "high probability low base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high probability state is more advantageous to the player than the normal probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a normal probability state is set. Then, by winning the jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, in a jackpot game, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, it is possible to switch to a high probability state. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. The high probability state can be switched from the high probability state to the normal probability state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot or by winning the next jackpot.

In the first embodiment, when the jackpot game is jackpot game X or jackpot game Z shown in FIG. 16, a high probability state is set after the execution of the jackpot game by the game ball passing through the specific area 16. be done. The setting of this high probability state is switched from the high probability state to the normal probability state when the jackpot determination is performed a first predetermined number of times (specifically, 130 times) without winning the jackpot. On the other hand, if the jackpot game is jackpot game Y shown in FIG. 16, or if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 in jackpot game X or jackpot game Z, after the execution of the jackpot game, the normal probability state is set.

The non-time saving state is set in a "low probability low base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" or "jackpot gaming state". The time saving state is set in the "low probability high base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a gaming state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state. It is. For example, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is longer (for example, 3.00 seconds) than the opening time (for example, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time-saving state, the special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment is performed using a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table that is set so that the special pattern fluctuation pattern with a short special pattern fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state. It is also possible to do so (see FIGS. 13 and 14). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to easily make the normal pattern fluctuation time shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, a regular pattern fluctuation time (5 seconds) is determined which is shorter than the regular pattern fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the short time state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater.

Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier to determine a hit in the hit determination compared to the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, a win is determined with a higher probability (for example, 59936/65536) than in the non-time-saving state (for example, 6600/65536). Therefore, in the time saving state, the number of times that a hit is determined to be a hit per unit time is greater.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in possession. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time saving state is set. For example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. The time-saving state can be changed from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

In the first embodiment, when the jackpot game is jackpot game X or jackpot game Z shown in FIG. 16, the time saving state is set after the execution of the jackpot game by the game ball passing through the specific area 16. Ru. In this time-saving state, the setting is switched from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the jackpot determination is performed a first predetermined number of times (specifically, 130 times) without winning a jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is jackpot game Y shown in FIG. 16, or when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 in jackpot game X or jackpot game Z, the time saving state is Set. In this time-saving state, the setting is switched from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the jackpot determination is performed a second predetermined number of times (specifically, 100 times) without winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the time saving state, compared to the non-time saving state, it is easier to win a prize, the normal pattern fluctuation time is more likely to be shortened, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is more likely to be longer. Three points are set to be advantageous to the player regarding the game related to the common map. However, only some of these points may be set advantageously for this player.

Furthermore, the gaming state after the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on for the first time is a "low probability low base gaming state" in which a normal probability state and a non-time saving state are set. This gaming state is also referred to as a "normal gaming state." In addition, in the "jackpot game state", a hit determination is performed but a jackpot determination is not performed, so a non-time saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. Furthermore, regarding the gaming states, it is possible to use all or only some of the gaming states described above. In addition, game states other than the normal gaming state include "high probability high base state", "high probability low base state", "low probability high base state", "high probability state", "time saving state", and "high base state". ”, the “jackpot gaming state” can be called a “bonus gaming state” in which a privilege is given to the player.

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 18 to 24.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, special symbol fluctuation production is performed in the "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variation production and indicates that it is in a standby state where no special symbol variation production is performed. The customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (A-1), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display screen 50a ("light amount settings"), and frequency settings for the effects to be performed ("effect settings").

The normal production mode can be set when a special symbol variation production is being performed in the "low probability low base gaming state" or the "high probability low base gaming state", and is a production mode that indicates a non-time saving state. be. The normal presentation mode includes, for example, a first normal presentation mode in which a background image representing a daytime mountain scene (daytime normal background image G102) is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-1). 18(B-2), a second normal effect mode in which a background image representing an evening mountain scene (evening normal background image G103) is displayed on the display screen 50a, and FIG. 18(B-2). -3) As shown in 3), there is a third normal performance mode in which a background image representing a nighttime mountain scene (normal nighttime background image G104) is displayed on the display screen 50a. It can be switched on the condition that the special figure variation effect is performed once or multiple times. Furthermore, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a normal second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the normal first stage production mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the normal second stage production mode, depending on the type of reach A dedicated background image will be displayed. Furthermore, a special performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" may be provided.

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when a special symbol variation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode that indicates a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-4), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the probability variable performance mode includes a probability variable first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol fluctuation performance, and a probability variable second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the probability variable first stage production mode, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the probability variation second stage production mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when the special symbol variation performance is being performed in the "low probability high base game state", and is a performance mode that indicates the normal probability state and the time-saving state. In the time-saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-5), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G106) is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the time-saving performance mode includes a time-saving first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a time-saving second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the time-saving first performance mode, the time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the time-saving second stage performance mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot production mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A jackpot opening performance in which the winning image G108 is displayed is performed. During a round in a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-2), a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out are displayed on the display screen 50a. A round performance will be held. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-3), on the display screen 50a, an ending image G111 indicating the performance mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total amount paid out in the jackpot game state are displayed. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which a total prize ball number image G112 indicating the prize ball number is displayed.

In the first embodiment, when the jackpot game is the "V long jackpot (jackpot game X, jackpot game Z)" shown in FIG. The game ball is opened in an opening time of .5 seconds, and the game ball that has won a prize in this second grand prize opening 15 can further pass through a specific area 16. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine PY1, during the execution of this 10th round game, it is possible to execute the passing notification effect, as well as the first notification effect or the second notification effect.

The passing notification performance is a performance for notifying that the second grand prize opening 15 is opened and that the game ball can pass through the specific area 16. The character display image G120 shown in FIG. 19(A) and the first line image G121, which is uttered by the character shown in the character display image G120 and shows the character string "Let the ball pass through the specific area!", are displayed on the display unit 50a. This is an image production. By executing such a passing notification performance, it is possible to make the player understand that the game ball can pass through the specific area 16 within the second grand prize opening 15.

The first notification performance is a performance for notifying that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16. This first notification effect displays a character display image G120 shown in FIG. 19 (B-1) and a second dialogue image G122 that shows the character string "Congratulations on passing!" uttered by the character shown in the character display image G120. This is an image effect displayed on the section 50a. By executing such a first notification effect, it is possible to make the player understand that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 within the second grand prize opening 15. After executing the jackpot game, the player can be made aware that the gaming state will be set to the high probability high base gaming state until the jackpot determination is performed a first predetermined number of times (130 times) at maximum. be.

On the other hand, the second notification performance is a performance that can notify that the game ball has not passed through the specific area 16, contrary to the first notification performance. This second notification effect includes a character display image G120 shown in FIG. 19 (B-2), and a third dialogue image G123 showing the character string "Unfortunate..." uttered by the character shown in the character display image G120. This is an image effect that displays on the display section 50a. By executing such a second notification effect, the player can be made aware that the game ball has not passed through the specific area 16 within the second big prize opening 15. Then, after executing the jackpot game, the player can be made aware that the gaming state will be set to the low probability, high base gaming state.

In addition, in the first embodiment, if the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the reference number (80000) during the execution of a jackpot game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. The first notification effect shown in B-1) is not performed, and instead, the second notification effect shown in FIG. 19 (B-2) is performed.

In the first embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number in a jackpot game, the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (specifically, the timing of the end of the rush shown in FIG. 26(C) (i.e. It is determined that the game will be stopped at the timing of switching from the high-probability-high base state to the normal gaming state. Therefore, if the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the standard number in the currently running "V long jackpot", if the first notification effect is performed as the game ball passes into the specific area 16 of the jackpot game, Thereafter, even though the game is controlled to be stopped, the player is made to expect a further jackpot in the high-probability, high-base game state after the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, even if a game ball passes through the specific area 16 in a "V long jackpot" where the number of difference balls is equal to or greater than the standard number, the second notification effect is performed instead of the first notification effect, so that the jackpot game is To make a player aware that after execution, a low probability high base game state which is more disadvantageous is set instead of a high probability high base game state where the result of jackpot determination is likely to be a jackpot win and is advantageous to the player. is possible.

4-2. Special Figure Variation Effect Next, the special figure variation effect (also simply referred to as "variation effect") will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result). In the special symbol variation production, a variation display of production symbols is performed on the display screen 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. The production design is composed of, for example, number symbols from 1 to 9, and in the variable display of the production design, the production design changes with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, and the production pattern changes with the end of the variable display of the special pattern. stops. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, the result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of the performance symbols.

In addition, in the special figure variation production, in addition to the variable display of production symbols, there are various displays such as the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the normal button 40, the special button 41, etc. It is possible to perform other performances using similar performance equipment. In this case, even after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to continue performing other performances.

4-2-1. Effect pattern display area As shown in FIG. 20(A), the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 has left effects on the left side, center, and right side of the display screen 50a, which is divided into three parts approximately equally in the horizontal direction. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle performance symbol area 50b2, and a right performance symbol area 50b3. The left performance symbol area 50b1 is an area where the left performance symbol EZ1 is displayed when the performance symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation performance. Similarly, the middle performance symbol area 50b2 and the right performance symbol region 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle performance symbol EZ2 and the right performance symbol EZ3.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 20(A), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in one section of the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display screen 50a. The small symbol area 50c is an area where the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed when the special symbol is variably displayed. The small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are composed of numerical symbols 1 to 9, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 20(A), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left presentation pattern area 50b1. , the middle effect pattern area 50b2, the right effect pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are described to represent the range, and are not actually displayed.

4-2-2. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of the special symbols starts, for example, as shown in FIG. , EZ2, EZ3" (also referred to as "production pattern EZ") are displayed in a stopped state, and the left small pattern KZ1, medium and small pattern KZ2, and right small pattern KZ3 are also stopped and displayed, and the special pattern is variablely displayed. As shown in FIG. 20(B), from the state where the variable display of special symbols is being waited for, the variable display of production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 starts, and the small symbols Variable display of KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is started. Note that "↓" in FIG. 19 indicates that the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of this special symbol is, for example, "normal loss variation", the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are different, as shown in FIG. 20 (C-1). After temporarily stopping in the stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called flop) that suggests a loss, as shown in FIG. 20(D). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. There are multiple types of stopping patterns that indicate a loss, such as "1, 1, 2" and "2, 4, 6", in which the left and right symbols are not the same. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern with a reach, such as "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. 20 (C-2), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 temporarily stop in the same stopping manner (so-called reach eye), and reach is established. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continued, and a reach effect is performed according to the special symbol variation pattern. Note that the stopping order and stopping manner of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established in the normal variation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination may be a "jackpot", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In N reach, as shown in FIG. 21(A), the state in which reach is established is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. 21(B), the fluctuation speed of the medium effect symbol EZ2 gradually changes. It slows down. If the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. Symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a miss in the reach. There are a plurality of types of stopping patterns that suggest a miss in the reach, such as "7, 6, 7" and "5, 3, 5", in which the left and right symbols are the same and the inner symbol is different from the left and right symbols. On the other hand, if the special pattern fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", the game will stop in a stopping manner (so-called double) that suggests a jackpot, as shown in Figure 21 (C-2). indicate. There are multiple types of stopping patterns that suggest a jackpot, such as "7.7.7" and "2.2.2", in which the symbols in the left and right middles are the same. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. In addition, the performance content of N reach is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium performance symbol EZ2, but can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2-4. SP Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 22(A), a background image dedicated to SP reach (SP reach background image G113) is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the SP An image (SP reach start title image) G1 representing that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 22(B), an SP reach-only performance (for example, a battle performance) is performed. Then, when the final phase of the SP reach-only performance is reached, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "SP jackpot variation", the display screen will appear as shown in FIG. 22 (C-1). At 50a, a production that suggests a jackpot (for example, a display in which the main character is happy after winning the battle) is performed, and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 stop in a stop mode that suggests a jackpot (so-called double eye). indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. On the other hand, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in Figure 22 (C-2), an effect that suggests a loss (for example, an enemy character enters the battle At the same time, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss of reach. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. Note that the contents of the SP reach performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each reach will be stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot (jackpot expectation level, winning expectation level) will be explained in detail. The jackpot expectation level for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the jackpot determination result. For example, if the execution probability of N Reach is 10% when the jackpot determination result is "Lose" and 100% when the jackpot determination result is "Jackpot", the execution probability of SP Reach is If the result of the jackpot judgment is "Lose", it is set to 4%, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is "Jackpot", it is set to 100%, then the jackpot expectation of SP reach is higher than the jackpot expectation of N reach. It is possible to set it higher. In addition, SP Reach A and SP Reach B are made executable as SP Reach, and the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and if the result of the Jackpot determination is "Lose", the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2%. If the probability of executing SP Reach B is set to 20% in the case of , the execution probability of SP Reach B will be set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and 30% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose". For example, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach B higher than the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach A. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level.

4-3. Pending Icon Display Area The display screen 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a pending icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 23(A). The reservation icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3, and a fourth display area 50d4. It is possible to display the hold icon HA in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, and 50d4. For example, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "2", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and A hold icon HA is displayed in the second display area 50d2.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 23(A), an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area can be provided near the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the icon TA, which is the same as or different from the pending icon HA, in response to the start of the special figure variation effect.

Note that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the reservation icon display area 50d can be used as a display area that displays both the number of special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2, or can be used as a display area that displays only one of them.

4-3-1. Hold Performance Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform hold performance in response to a game ball entering the first starting slot 11 or the second starting slot 12. The reservation performance can notify the player of the number of special symbols 1 or 2 reserved.

In the hold effect, when the game ball enters the first starting slot 11 when the special figure 1 hold count is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, and for example, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls enter the first starting slot 11 during the special figure variation performance, as shown in FIG. 23(C), the first display area 50d1 and the second display area of the reserved icon display area 50d A hold icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is informed that the special figure 1 hold count is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is finished and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 23(D), the hold icon displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the hold icon HA that was displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed. Then, the player is informed that the number of special drawings 1 pending is "1".

4-4. Preview Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a preview performance at any timing during the special figure variation performance. The preview performance is a performance using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the buttons 40, 41, etc., and includes the results of jackpot determination and special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to suggest the results of

4-4-1. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body performance using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as a preview performance. The movable body performance is a performance that operates the movable devices 55, 56, and 58, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win.

In the movable object performance, for example, when N reach progresses to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap with the display screen 50a as seen from the player, leading to SP reach. At this time, an effect image is displayed on the display screen 50a in a space that does not overlap with the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. Note that the movable body performance is not limited to suggesting the development of SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-2. Operation performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation performance using the normal button 40 and special button 41 as a preview performance. The operation performance is a performance in which the player operates the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win.

In the operation performance, for example, in SP reach, a period (button operation validity period) occurs during which the press operation of the special button 41 is valid, and with the occurrence of this button operation validity period, as shown in FIG. 25 (A) , a performance that prompts the user to operate the special button 41 (button operation promotion performance) is performed. In the button operation promotion effect, a button operation promotion image G3 is displayed on the display screen 50a. The button operation promotion image G3 includes an image imitating the special button 41 (special button image G31), an image (press operation image G32) representing the operation mode of the special button 41 (that is, a press operation), and a button operation valid period. An image representing the remaining time (operation valid period remaining time image G33). Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G33 is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Thereafter, in response to the special button 41 being pressed during the button operation valid period, or after the button operation valid period has elapsed without any special button 41 being operated during the button operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 25(B). As shown in , the on-board movable device 55 is activated, and as seen from the player, the on-board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display screen 50a, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot. Note that the operation performance is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-3. Pre-read performance The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing a pre-read performance for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the special figure lottery has not been performed, as a preview effect. The pre-reading performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for the special symbol 1 reservation or the special symbol 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead effect, for example, if the result of the look-ahead determination for special drawing 1 hold is "jackpot", the hold icon HA, which is normally displayed as "〇", in the hold icon display area 50d, as shown in FIG. 23(C). may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "lost", the hold icon HA may be displayed as "☆" as a so-called fake effect. In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the change is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, and changes or additions can be made as appropriate. For example, it is also possible to change the stopping manner of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special symbol variation performance.

5. Display on 7-segment display Next, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9) will be described. On the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio between the total number of normal prize balls won by the player in the normal gaming state and the normal number of balls fired by the player in the normal gaming state, is displayed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. Note that the 7-segment display 300 displays bases other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state to the number of time-saving shot balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, and jackpot game). The jackpot base, which is the ratio between the total number of jackpot balls won by the player in the jackpot game state and the number of jackpot balls fired by the player in the jackpot game state, is never displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to always count the number of normally fired balls, the total number of normally prized balls, and the total number of fired balls. The total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). The total number of fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor. The number of normally fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor only in the normal game state. The total number of normal prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out by the game control microcomputer 101 in the normal gaming state.

The information on the number of normally fired balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are stored in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104 (FIG. (see) is stored in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normally fired balls, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are maintained (not deleted). In this way, even if the RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base using the normal number of balls fired at the time of power cutoff and the normal total prize ball number at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 then displays the normal base value on the 7-segment display 300 regardless of the gaming state (in the normal gaming state, jackpot gaming state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). It is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 9)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of fired balls into 60,000 rounds. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of fired balls reaches 60,000 becomes the first normal base. Thereafter, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 60,001 shots, the value that was the first normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated when the total number of fired balls increases from 60,001 to 120,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 120,001 shots, the value that was the normal base of the previous round will be stored as the normal base of the second round, and the value that was the current normal base will be stored as the normal base of the previous round. Ru. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 120,001 to 180,000 becomes the current normal base.

After that, if the total number of balls fired exceeds 180,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 1 time ago will be stored as the normal base 2 times ago. The value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 240,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 3 times ago will be deleted, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago. The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times before, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time before. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 240,001 to 300,000 becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, the normal base is similarly calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the normal base values up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the second previous normal base, and the third previous normal base at the maximum in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104. You can leave it there. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the current normal base ⇒ 1 previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 on the 7-segment display 300. The display is changed every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (first display area 310 and second display area 320 (see FIG. 9)), the right two digits (third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340), the current normal base is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value shown in the right two digits (normal base) is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the current normal base display started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b1" in the left two digits, and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the previous normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 will display "b2" in the left two digits, and the two previous normal base will be displayed in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the normal base two times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the display of the previous two normal bases started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits, and the three previous normal bases in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the normal base three times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the normal base display three times before, on the 7-segment display 300, as described above, the left two digits indicate "bL" and the right two digits indicate the current state. The normal base of is displayed and the same is repeated thereafter.

Furthermore, in the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less after the power is turned on for the first time after shipping from the factory, "--" is displayed in the two digits on the right. That is, when the total number of fired balls is 300 balls or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and after the total number of fired balls exceeds 300 balls, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less, the value of the denominator of the normal base (number of normally fired balls) is too small, which avoids displaying the unreliable value of the normal base. There is. In addition, even if the total number of fired balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 will repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

In addition, on the 7-segment display 300, if the number of balls normally fired is 6000 balls or less after the power is turned on for the first time after leaving the factory, the two digits on the left will indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", "b3". ' will start blinking. Thereafter, when the number of normally fired balls exceeds 6000 balls after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" indicated by the two digits on the left become lit. In this way, when the two digits on the left flash to a person who is checking the normal base on the 7-segment display 300, the normal base value shown on the two digits on the right has not yet converged sufficiently. It is possible to make the user understand that the value is not present. In other words, if you show the lighting mode in the two digits on the left to someone who is checking the normal base, they will understand that the normal base value shown in the two digits on the right is a value that has converged to some extent. It is possible to do so.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. Thereafter, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode ends and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340. In this way, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on until the normal base display starts. As described above, when transitioning to the setting mode after the power is turned on, the initial display is executed after the setting mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting parts LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 9) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, "8.8.8.8." is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. In this way, the initial display is performed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on, thereby indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally.

6. Over-winning ball prevention function Next, the over-winning ball prevention function will be explained. In this pachinko game machine PY1, the game control microcomputer 101 is capable of operating an excessive prize ball prevention function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, the over-prize ball prevention function is a function that makes the game unplayable on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 (standard number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player obtains (is paid out to the player) in all gaming states (normal playing state, jackpot playing state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) It is. Note that the total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to pay out to the player, but does not mean the total number of prize balls that are actually paid out to the player. It's okay. As mentioned above, the total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. It is stored in the total prize pitch number storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of fired balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the gaming RAM 104. The total number of balls fired is stored in the storage unit 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of balls fired from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the calculated difference number of balls is The difference number of balls is stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c (see FIG. 6) provided in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the RAM 104.

Therefore, even if RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of prize balls, the information on the total number of fired balls, and the information on the difference number of balls stored in the non-erasable storage section 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the difference in the number of balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of fired balls at the time of power cutoff. Note that the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to treat the difference number of balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of balls fired is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In the first embodiment, when the over-winning ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 34), but also stops the game ball prevention function. The firing control process (the process of step S109 described later, see FIG. 34) for firing the is also stopped. Therefore, even if the player rotates the handle 72k, the game ball is not shot, and the player can immediately notice that the game cannot be played. In addition, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and stops receiving signals according to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and the display devices 8 and 7 segments The display control of the display 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal board 160 via the dispensing control board 170.

After the over-winning ball prevention function is activated, the situation in which the game cannot be executed continues until the power is cut off. In the first embodiment, the over-prize ball prevention function is canceled on the condition that RAM clearing is executed. That is, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the employee of the gaming hall shuts off the power by turning off the power switch 193. Then, when turning on the power by turning on the power switch 193, the employee of the gaming hall depresses the RAM clear switch 191. Thereby, by executing RAM clear, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and firing control process regarding the game. In this way, in the first embodiment, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game cannot be restarted simply by turning the power off and on (re-on), but the game is restarted by executing RAM clear. be able to.

Next, the timing at which the excessive prize ball prevention function operates will be explained based on FIG. 26. The over-prize ball prevention function is activated when the player shifts from an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player to a normal gaming state on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. In other words, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not necessarily operate at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000. In the first embodiment, the advantageous gaming state is a high probability high base state after a jackpot game or a low probability high base state after a jackpot game.

For example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 26(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 26(B). At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of transitioning from this jackpot game state to the high-accuracy, high-base state, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(C), at the timing of transition from the high-accuracy, high-base state to the normal gaming state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in the first embodiment, the game is not stopped in the middle of the jackpot game state or the high probability high base state, and the game is ended at a good timing when the advantageous game state for the player ends. Is possible.

In the first embodiment, the information on the difference number of balls is stored in the difference number storage unit 107c of the non-erasable storage unit 107, and the difference number of balls is not reset (cleared) by turning the power off and on. do not have. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the difference in the number of balls will not be reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko game machine PY1, even during business hours, there are situations where the power is turned off and turned on (re-on) or the RAM is cleared due to bugs, malfunctions, severe fraud, etc. In such a situation, if the difference in the number of balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the purpose of providing the over-prize ball prevention function will be lost. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or severe fraud occurs, there is a risk that the player who restarts the game afterward will be given an unfair advantage by making it difficult for the over-prize ball prevention function to operate. Therefore, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the above-mentioned unfair advantage from being given to the player, the number of differential balls is not reset by turning the power back on or by executing RAM clearing.

Next, the conditions under which the difference number of balls is reset will be explained based on FIG. 27. In the first embodiment, there are two reset conditions under which the difference number of balls is reset. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 27(A). In other words, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. do. Note that when the information on the number of differential balls stored in the differential ball number storage section 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the total number of award balls and the total number of balls stored in the total number of award balls storage section 107a are also reset (cleared). The information on the total number of fired balls stored in the fired ball number storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter it will simply be referred to as "the difference number of balls is reset (cleared)". Although FIG. 27A shows a case in which the number of differential balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed while waiting for a customer, it does not matter in which gaming state (for example, normal gaming state). However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference number of balls is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 27(A). In other words, if the game is not played for an hour after transitioning to the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 will delete the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. clear. Note that the customer waiting state is a gaming state in which no game is executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 27(A) and 27(B), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in a jackpot game state due to a game played by a certain player. Thereafter, when a certain player transitions from the jackpot gaming state to the high-probability-high-base state and then to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the player has finished playing the game. In this case, for the player who starts the next game, if the number of difference balls increases by a small amount (within 10,000), the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated, which is extremely disadvantageous.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of differential balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. Thereby, an employee of the gaming parlor can press the special reset switch 181 at any timing after a certain player finishes playing the game to reset the number of difference balls. Further, as shown in FIG. 27(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference in the number of balls is automatically reset. Thereby, the difference in the number of balls can be reset without placing a burden on the employees of the game parlor. In this way, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the next player who starts the game from having the excessive prize ball prevention function activated immediately after starting the game, which would put him at a huge disadvantage. It is possible.

Next, the performance mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated will be explained based on FIG. 28(A). When the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. 28(A), a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a, and "Error An error cancellation method image ERX showing the error is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 28(A) makes it possible for the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be played. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 28(A) continues until the power is cut off. The effect mode shown in FIG. 28(A) is canceled when RAM clear is executed, but it continues as it is only by turning the power back on.

Here, a description will be given of a case in which illegal magnetism is detected in this pachinko gaming machine PY1. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal according to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the firing control process related to the game, similarly to when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, the situation in which the game cannot be executed due to magnetic detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes game control processing and firing control processing regarding the game by turning the power off and on (returning the power on). can do.

Next, the presentation mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be explained based on FIG. 28(B). When an incorrect magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. An error release method image ER1 indicating "Please do so" is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, when comparing the performance mode when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated (see Figure 27 (A)) and the performance mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see Figure 28 (B)), the cancellation method Everything other than the image is the same. Therefore, it is necessary to make employees or players at the gaming parlor aware that they are in a situation where they cannot play the game both when illegal magnetism is detected and when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. It is possible to make it easier.

Next, the performance mode when the difference number of balls reaches 70,000 will be explained based on FIG. 29(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 26(A). First, as shown in FIG. 29(A), a round image G109 and a prize ball number image G110 are displayed on the display screen 50a. When the difference number of balls reaches 70,000, a purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and an over-prize image EFa is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a, indicating that "over-prize ball abnormality with 10,000 shots left". A ball preview image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple border image EFa and the over-prized ball preview image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation where the over-prized ball prevention function is about to be activated. The display of the purple border image EFa continues even after the jackpot game state ends, but the display of the super prize ball preview image KY ends when the jackpot game state ends. Note that the over-prize ball preview image KY may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Next, the presentation mode when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 will be explained based on FIG. 29(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 26(B). As shown in FIG. 29(B), a round image G109 and a prize ball number image G110 are displayed on the display screen 50a. When the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000, a red border image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and a game stop notice image KH indicating that the game will be stopped when the rush ends is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know that the game stop is approaching and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb continues even after the jackpot gaming state ends, but the display of the game stop notice image KH ends when the jackpot gaming state ends. Note that the game stop notice image KH may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Here, after the number of differential balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 26(A), the presentation mode in the high-accuracy-high base state is as shown in FIG. 30(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 30(A), on the display screen 50a, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. This purple border image EFa allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000.

Further, after the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 26(B), the presentation mode in the high-accuracy-high base state is as shown in FIG. 30(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 30(B), on the display screen 50a, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. This red edge image EFb allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(A), a presentation mode will be described when the difference number of balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. In this case, a situation arises in which an employee of the gaming hall opens the front door 23 to the outer frame 22 and presses the special reset switch 181. Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and as shown in FIG. is displayed. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(B), the performance mode when the customer waiting state continues for one hour will be described. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display screen 50a. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

7. Passable notification effect, first notification effect, and second notification effect.Next, during the execution of the jackpot game, there are passable notification effects when the number of difference balls exceeds the reference number (80000), and when the reference number is not reached. Execution of the first notification effect and the second notification effect will be explained using FIG. 32. In the first embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 121 refers to the difference in the number of balls at the start of the execution of the jackpot game to be played, and determines whether the difference in the number of balls will be equal to or greater than the reference number during the execution of the jackpot game. judge.

Specifically, when the jackpot game to be played from now on is the jackpot game It is determined whether the difference number of balls (information on the number of difference balls) is 79250 (750 less than the reference number) or more. When the difference number of balls is 79250 or more, the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference number of balls becomes equal to or more than the reference number during execution of the jackpot game X. On the other hand, if the difference number of balls is less than 79250, it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the reference number during execution of the jackpot game X.

In addition, when the jackpot game to be played from now on is jackpot game Z, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores the difference ball number storage unit 107c of the main control board 100 at the timing when the execution of this jackpot game Z starts. It is determined whether the difference number of balls (information on the number of difference balls) is 78500 (1500 less than the reference number) or more. When the difference number of balls is 78,500 or more, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference number of balls becomes equal to or more than the reference number during execution of the jackpot game Z. On the other hand, when the difference number of balls is less than 78,500, it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the reference number during execution of the jackpot game Z.

If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls does not reach the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game (jackpot game At the same time as the round game (round game) starts, execution of the passing possibility notification effect is started on the display section 50a (see FIG. 32(A)). Then, during the execution of 10R, if the game ball passes through the specific area 16 of the second big prize opening 15 (FIG. 32(B)), the execution of the passing possibility notification effect is switched to the execution of the first notification effect ( (See Figure 32 (C-1)). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 ends the execution of the passable notification performance and starts the execution of the first notification performance when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 of the second big prize opening 15. In addition, during the execution of 10R, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 of the second grand prize opening 15, the execution of the passing possibility notification effect is switched to the execution of the second notification effect (FIG. 19 (B- 2)). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 ends the execution of the passable notification performance and starts the execution of the second notification performance by closing the second big prize opening 15 of 10R.

On the other hand, even if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls will be equal to or greater than the reference number during the execution of the jackpot game (Jackpot game X, jackpot game Z) that will be played from now on, As in the case where it is determined that the game is not reached, execution of the passing possibility notification effect is started on the display unit 50a at the start of 10R of the jackpot game (see FIG. 32(A)). Then, during the execution of 10R, if the game ball passes through the specific area 16 of the second big prize opening 15 (FIG. 32(B)), the execution of the passing possibility notification effect is switched to the execution of the second notification effect ( (See Figure 32(C-2))). That is, during execution of 10R, even if a game ball passes through the specific area 16 of the second big prize opening 15, the performance control microcomputer 121 starts executing the second notification performance instead of the first notification performance. In addition, during the execution of 10R, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 of the second grand prize opening 15, the passable notification effect will be activated as in the case where it is determined that the difference in the number of balls does not reach the standard number. The execution switches to the execution of the second notification effect (see FIG. 32 (C-2)).

On the other hand, when the jackpot game to be played from now on is jackpot game Y, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of difference balls (information on the number of difference balls) stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the main control board 100 is No judgment is made regarding the reference number. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 121 does not execute the passable notification performance on the display section 50a at the start of 10R (10th round game) of the jackpot game Y.

8. Operation of the game control microcomputer [Main control main processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 33 to 49. Note that the counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 101 are provided in the gaming RAM 104. When the power of the pachinko game machine PY1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the main control board 100 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, a power-on processing is first performed (step S001).

In the power-on process (S001), for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, gaming CPU 102 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for interrupt time management) settings, and when power is restored. Performs initial settings such as setting the work area of the gaming RAM 104 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the power-on process (S001) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001), the gaming control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clearing when a signal based on the pressing operation to the RAM clearing switch 191 is input. When RAM clearing is executed, gaming information (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, information on the number of reserved special drawings, jackpot determination results, etc.) stored in the gaming RAM 104 is erased. However, even if the RAM clear is executed, the information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and the difference balls. The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the number storage unit 107c is not cleared.

In this power-on process (S001), a game stop flag, which will be described later, is switched to OFF when RAM clear is executed while it is ON. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed while the game stop flag is ON, it remains ON. In other words, the state of the game stop flag does not change just by turning the power back on. In this way, after the game stop flag is turned ON due to the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not RAM clear is executed.

Following the power-on processing (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, interrupts are permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, it is executed at a period of 4 msec, for example. After the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) starts, various counters are updated by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003). The value update process is executed repeatedly.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34, in the main side timer interrupt process (S005), it is first determined whether the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned ON when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unplayable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), then input processing to be described later is executed (S102).

Next, normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is executed (S103). The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. 33. Subsequently, sensor detection processing is executed (S104).

In the sensor detection process (S104), general winning hole sensor processing, gate sensor processing, second starting hole sensor processing, first starting hole sensor processing, first big winning hole sensor processing, second big winning hole sensor processing, specific area Sensor processing and discharge port sensor processing are performed sequentially. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

In the general winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the general winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the gate sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the regular symbol retention storage section 106 provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the common symbol reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random number is not stored. Furthermore, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 2-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 2-related random number is is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 2 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. Ru. In addition, when the special figure 2 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 2 related random number is not stored. Further, a second pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 2 related random number and the second pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 2 pending number command representing the number of special figure 2 related random numbers (special figure 2 pending number) stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b and a second look-ahead judgment are executed. A second starting port sensor command including a second starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 1-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 1-related random number is is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 1 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. Ru. In addition, when the special figure 1 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 1 related random number is not stored. Moreover, the first pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 1 pending number command representing the number of special figure 1 related random numbers (special figure 1 pending number) stored in the special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a and a first look-ahead judgment are executed. A command for the first starting port sensor including a first starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the second big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor. Further, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the discharge port sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the discharge port sensor.

After the sensor detection process (S104) shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a normal operation process (S105). In the normal operation process (S105), a normal symbol standby process, a normal symbol variation process, a normal symbol confirmation process, and an auxiliary game control process are sequentially performed. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not being performed. In the normal symbol standby process, a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 106. In addition, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state to determine a normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, a normal pattern variation start command including information regarding the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern is generated. Then, based on the general pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern, the general pattern display 82 starts variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process that is performed during the variable display of the normal symbol. In the ordinary symbol variation process, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result in response to the elapse of the ordinary symbol fluctuation time after the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol that is being executed. Then, a general pattern variation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern is generated.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process, when a predetermined stopping time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol being executed starts, the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. Determine whether it exists or not. If the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

The auxiliary game control process is a process that is performed when an auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. In addition, an auxiliary game control command is generated according to the result of the processing.

After the normal operation process (S105) shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a difference ball number measurement process (S106), which will be described later, and a special operation process (S107), which will be described later. Subsequently, a sorting device control process for controlling the sorting device 16D is executed (S108).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls (S109). That is, by executing the firing control process (S109), the player can fire the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the firing control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be fired even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process for controlling the display on the 7-segment display 300 (S110). Next, error processing is executed to determine an error due to magnetic detection (fraud), an error due to opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m, etc. (S111). In error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not illegal magnetism has been detected by the magnetic sensor. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. In the error process (S111), the front door sensor or the front frame sensor determines whether the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is open. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes an output process to be described later (S112). Subsequently, other processing is executed (S113). As other processing (S113), for example, based on the number of special symbols on hold, the special symbol on hold display 83 is controlled in a display mode that shows the number, a timer is updated, etc.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power-off monitoring process when the power is cut off (S114), and ends this process. In the power outage monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power will be cut off due to a drop in the monitoring voltage, it will update game information, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and number of difference balls. information, game stop flag information, etc. are stored in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 104. Thereafter, access to the gaming RAM 104 is prohibited.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 35, in the input processing (S102), it is first determined whether the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181 has been received. (S201) If it is not ON (NO in S201), the process advances to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erasing clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erasing clearing process (S202), information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and number of difference balls. The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erasing clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erasing storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because the information on the total number of fired balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300, as described above.

Following step S202, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the production control board 120, as shown in FIG. 31(A), the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 50a. In step S204, other processing is executed and the present processing ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the lower tray 35 is full, and stores it in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 as lower tray full data. .

[Difference ball number measurement process] As shown in FIG. 36, in the difference ball number measurement process (S106), first, a total prize ball count process is executed to count the total number of prize balls paid out to the player (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage section 107a (see FIG. 6). Next, a total number of fired balls counting process is executed to count the total number of fired balls based on the detection by the discharge port sensor (S302). Information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the total number of fired balls storage section 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the difference ball number calculation process is executed to calculate the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls (S303). Information on the calculated difference number of balls is stored in the difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 6).

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether the over-prize ball notification flag is OFF. The over-prized ball notice flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70,000 (NO in S305), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70,000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notification flag is turned on (S306), and the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. As a result, when the super prize ball preview command is sent to the performance control board 120, the purple border image EFa and the super prize ball preview image KY are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 29(A). .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is OFF. The over-prize ball flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (S309). If it is less than 80,000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80,000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize ball flag is turned ON (S310), and the over-prize ball notification flag is turned OFF (S311). Then, an over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is sent to the production control board 120, the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 29(B).

[Special operation processing] As shown in FIG. 37, in the special operation processing (S107), the processing regarding the special figure display 81 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 14D, second grand prize device 15D) is divided into four stages. "Special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. Then, when the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1302), and when the "special operation status" is "2". If (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305) , Special symbol confirmation processing (S1306) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "4" (all of S1301, S1303, and S1305 are NO), special electric accessory processing (S1307) is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process] As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol standby process (S1302), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special symbol 2) is "0" or not. is determined (S1401). If the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1401), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the second starting slot 12, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 11 (namely, the number of reserved balls for special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). If the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the first starting slot 11, the customer It is determined whether the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the vehicle is in a customer waiting state. If it is ON (YES in S1416), a customer waiting measurement process to be described later is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO in S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this process ends.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is not "0" (NO in S1401), that is, the memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 12 (the reserved information of special drawing 2 ), when there is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1403), which will be described later, are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the first reservation in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b. Clear the storage area to be used (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to start variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special pattern 2 variation start command) set in the special pattern 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special pattern stop pattern data set in the special pattern 2 jackpot determination process (S1402). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including information on variation time) are included.

Also, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information for special drawing 2, but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0". If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the 1 starting slot 11 (pending information of the special figure 1), the later-described special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) and the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the fourth reservation in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a. Clear the storage area (the storage area furthest from the side from which the data is read) (S1411). In this way, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) includes the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) (information including information on variation time) are included.

Proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON or not, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process is executed to clear (reset) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the gaming RAM 104 and is used to measure the time that the customer waiting state continues. Note that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared by turning on the power again, regardless of whether RAM clearing is executed or not.

[Customer waiting measurement process] As shown in FIG. 39, in the customer waiting measurement process (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increasing process is executed to increase the value of the customer waiting counter (S1420). Thereby, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the duration of the customer waiting state based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Next, it is determined whether the customer waiting state continues for more than one hour. If it is determined that the process is not continuing (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process continues (YES in S1421), a non-erasing clear process is executed (S1422), similar to the process in step S202 described above (see FIG. 35). As a result, information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c are stored. The information on the number of balls that are currently in play will be cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1423), and this processing is completed. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the production control board 120, the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 31(B).

[Special figure 2 jackpot determination process (special figure 1 jackpot determination process)] The special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) are based on FIG. 40 because the processing flow is the same. I will explain them all together. As shown in FIG. 40, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) or the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), first, a special symbol random number (jackpot random number) is read out as a determination value (S1501). Specifically, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), it is stored in the first storage area of the special figure 2 pending storage section 105b of the gaming RAM 104 (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first of the second reserved special figure). Read out the special symbol random number. In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the value is stored in the first storage area of the special figure 1 pending storage section 105a of the gaming RAM 104 (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first of the first special figure pending). Read out the special pattern random number.

Next, a jackpot determination table (FIG. 12(A)) is set (S1502). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is high probability (S1503). If it is not in a high probability state (NO in S1503), that is, if it is in a normal probability state (non-high probability state), the table for the normal probability state (jackpot judgment value is "1000" to "1219"), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (S1504). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1503), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "1000" to "2499") among the jackpot judgment tables (Fig. 12 (A)). It is determined whether or not (S1505).

If the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is "jackpot", the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 12(B) (S1506). After determining the jackpot type (S1506), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1507), and the special figure stop symbol data corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S1508). finish. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is "lose", special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set (S1508) and the process ends.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process)] The special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) and the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) have the same processing flow. This will be explained together based on FIGS. 41 and 42. As shown in FIG. 41, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) or the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409), it is first determined whether the gaming state is a time-saving state (whether the time-saving flag is ON or not). (S1601)

If it is not in a time-saving state (NO in S1601), that is, in a non-time-saving state, it is then determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (S1602). If it is ON (YES in S1602), refer to the normal jackpot table in the non-time-saving state (the part corresponding to the non-time-saving state and jackpot in the special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table shown in FIG. 13 or 14), and select the special drawing. A special figure fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number (S1603).

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is not ON, it is determined whether the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (S1604). In addition, as shown in FIG. 12(C), the reach establishment random number value is "0" to "29" in the non-time saving state, and is "0" to "9" in the time saving state. In other words, it is harder to reach when you lose in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the processing speed of special drawing reservations by allowing more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times to be selected in the time-saving state.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (YES in S1604), that is, in the case of reach and loss, the reach and reach loss table in the non-time saving state (one of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14) A special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number (S1605).

On the other hand, if the reach random number is not a reach establishment random number (NO in S1604), that is, in the case of a no-reach loss, the reach-no-reach loss table during the non-time saving state (the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 or 14). Of these, a special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number (S1606). When there is no reach, a shortening variation function is activated according to the number of balls held. In other words, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", the special symbol has a shorter special symbol fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2". A variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13 or 14).

In addition, in step S1601, if it is determined that the gaming state is in the time saving state (YES in S1601), as shown in FIG. Processing (S1607 to S1611) is performed in the same flow as steps S1602 to S1606 described above except for setting the part corresponding to the time saving state in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in 14.

That is, if it is a jackpot, the special pattern fluctuation pattern is selected based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern random number with reference to the part in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and corresponding to the jackpot (S1608). Moreover, if it is a loss with a reach, a special pattern fluctuation pattern is selected based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern random number with reference to the part in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and corresponding to a loss with a reach. In addition, if it is a no-reach loss, a special pattern variation pattern is selected based on the special pattern variation pattern random number with reference to the part in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and corresponding to a no-reach loss (S1611).

After selecting the special figure variation pattern as described above, as shown in FIG. 41, the selected special figure variation pattern is set (S1612) and this process is finished. Information on the special symbol variation pattern set in step S1612 is included in the variation start command set in step S1406 or S1412 in the special symbol standby process (S1302), and is sent to the production control board 120 in the output process (S112). .

[Special symbol fluctuation processing] As shown in FIG. 43, in the special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304), first, the special symbol fluctuation time (the special symbol fluctuation time determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) , see FIG. 13 or 14) has elapsed (S1801). If the time has not passed (NO in S1801), this process ends immediately. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1801), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1802), and the special operation status is set to "3" (S1803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols at a symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) according to the set special symbol stop symbol data (S1804), this processing is ended.

[Special symbol confirmation process] As shown in FIG. 44, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1306), first, the stop time of the special symbol (the stop time determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1901). If the time has not passed (NO in S1901), this process ends immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbol is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process to be described later is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern (see FIG. 16 for details) corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the opening pattern (setting of data according to the opening pattern) may be performed for each round.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a game state reset process following step S1904 (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the control is performed in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special operation status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the special operation status is set to "1" (S1909) to end the process, in order to not start the jackpot game.

[Game State Management Process] As shown in FIG. 45, in the game state management process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON or not (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), decrease the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state by 1 (S2002), and check whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" or not. Determine (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the probability change flag is turned OFF (S2004) and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result in step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (YES in S2005), the value of the time-saving counter that counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time-saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" or not. (S2007) If it is "0" (YES in S2007), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2008) and the process advances to step S2009. If the determination result in step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process advances to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the process advances to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010) and the process proceeds to step S2011. In this way, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high probability high base state or the low probability low base state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute.

In step S2011, a game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. As a result, when the game stop notification command is sent to the production control board 120, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 28(A). Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

In step S2012, a gaming state designation command including information on the current gaming state (information on whether the probability change flag and time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the probability variation counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing is completed.

[Special electric accessory processing (jackpot game)] The special electric accessory processing is a process for executing a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 46, in the special electric accessory processing (S1307), it is first determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2701). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 14D, second jackpot device 15D) have been completed in the jackpot game being executed.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2701), whether or not the grand prize openings (first grand prize opening, second grand prize opening 15) are open (that is, the first grand prize device 14D or the second grand prize opening It is determined whether the device 15D is being opened (S2702). If it is not open (NO in S2702), whether or not the time has come to open the big winning opening, that is, whether the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time has come to start opening the first big winning opening 14; Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between openings has elapsed and it is time to start the next opening (S2703).

If the determination result in step S2703 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2703 is YES, it is determined whether the currently executing jackpot game is a jackpot game based on the V long jackpot (see FIG. 16) (S2704). If it is not a V long jackpot (NO in S2704), the process proceeds to step S2707, but if it is a V long jackpot (YES in S2704), whether or not it is the timing to start the 10th R that allows passage to specific area 16. Determine (S2705). If it is not the timing to start the 10th R (NO in S2705), the process directly advances to step S2707. On the other hand, if it is the timing to start the 10th R (YES in S2705), V valid period setting processing is performed (S2706).

In the V validity period setting process (S2706), the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a during the opening of the second grand prize opening 15 in the 10th round of the V long jackpot and for several seconds after the second grand prize opening 15 is closed. is set to the V validity period that is determined to be valid. In addition, in the first embodiment, a period other than this (including when a jackpot game is not executed) is set as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is determined to be invalid. Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is valid means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a. Further, determining that the detection of a game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a.

In step S2707, the big winning holes (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) are opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 16) depending on the type of jackpot. Note that the distribution member 16k always moves in a constant motion from the start of the first round of the round game. In the opening pattern of the V long jackpot, in the 10th round, the AT opening/closing member 14k is opened so that the game ball won in the second big prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 with a margin. On the other hand, in the opening pattern of the V short jackpot, in the 10th round, the distribution member 16k operates so that even if the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15, it cannot pass through the specific area 16. The opening timing of the AT opening/closing member 14k relative to the opening/closing member 14k is set.

Subsequently, in step S2708, round designation command transmission determination processing is performed, and the present processing ends. In the round designation command transmission determination process (S2708), it is determined whether or not the opening of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) in step S2703 is the first opening in one round game. If so, a round designation command including information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Note that in the first embodiment, the grand prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. Therefore, in this step S2708, the round designation command is always set.

In step S2702 of the special electric accessory processing (S1307), if the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 14, second grand prize opening 15) is being opened, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the grand prize opening are satisfied. (S2709). In the first embodiment, the closing condition is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in the round game reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (10 pieces per 1R in the first embodiment), or the closing condition is that the grand prize opening is closed. This means that one of the following conditions has been satisfied: that the time for opening the big prize opening has arrived (that is, that a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 16) has elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big prize opening is not satisfied (NO in S2709), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the closing conditions for the big winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) are satisfied (YES in S2709), the big winning opening is closed (blocked). S2710). Then, it is determined whether one round game (round interval) has ended (S2711). If it has not ended (NO in S2711), the process ends. On the other hand, when the round game ends (YES in S2711), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2712), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2713). If it is not "0" (NO in S2713), the process ends as it is in order to start the next round game.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S2713), a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot ending processing to end the jackpot game (S2714), and the jackpot ending is started (S2715). Then, a jackpot end flag is set (S2716) and the process ends.

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2701 (YES in S2701), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether the ending time of the jackpot game has elapsed (S2717), and the ending time has elapsed. If not (NO in S2717), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2717), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2718). Then, a game state setting process to be described later is performed (S2719). Subsequently, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2720). Subsequently, the special operation status is set to "1" (S2721), and this processing ends.

[Game state setting process] As shown in FIG. 47, in the game state setting process (S2719), it is first determined whether the V flag is ON (whether a V prize has been won during the V validity period) (S2801). If it is ON (YES in S2801), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2802), and the time saving flag is turned ON (S2803). As a result, the game is controlled to be in a highly accurate and high base state after the jackpot game. Subsequently, the probability change counter is set to "160" (S2804), the time saving counter is set to "160" (S2805), and the process advances to step S2808. As a result, the system is controlled to a high-accuracy, high-base state in which the ST number is 160 times and the time saving number is 160 times.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that the V flag is not ON (NO in S2801), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2806). That is, at this time, the probability change flag is not turned on. As a result, the game is controlled to a low-probability-high base state after the jackpot game. Subsequently, the time saving counter is set to "100" (S2807), and the process advances to step S2808. That is, this results in control to a low-accuracy, high-base state in which the number of times of time saving is 100.

In step S2808, the gaming control microcomputer 101 specifies the gaming state including information on the gaming state just set (ON or OFF of the probability variation flag, ON or OFF of the time saving flag, information on the value of the probability variation counter, and the value of the time saving counter). The command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In this way, the gaming state setting process (S2719) ends.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 48, in the output processing (S112), outer end signal output processing to be described later is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in each of the above-mentioned processing are output to the production control board 120 and the payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer edge signal output processing] As shown in FIG. 49, in the outer edge signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether or not the over-prize ball notification flag is ON (S3101). In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notification flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process advances to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to step S3102. In the outer edge signal output process for super prize ball notice (S3102), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer edge signal for super prize ball notice") is output to the main control board 100. The information is sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for announcing the winning ball to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the gaming hall who monitors the hall computer is made aware of the situation in which the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated if the number of differential balls increases by a small amount (within 10,000) in this pachinko gaming machine PY1. is possible.

In step S3103, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process advances to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), the outer end signal output process for over-prize balls is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to step S3105. In the outer edge signal output process for super prize balls (S3104), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of differential balls has reached 80,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer edge signal for super prize balls") is output from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for super prize ball preview to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the gaming hall monitoring the hall computer noticed that the number of differential balls in this pachinko machine PY1 had reached 80,000, and the game was executed when the high-accuracy high base state or the low-accuracy low base state ended. It is possible to understand the situation in which it becomes impossible.

In step S3105, it is determined whether the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is no longer playable. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3107), the process advances to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S3105), the game stop outer end signal output process is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output processing (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as the "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game has become impossible to execute due to the activation of the over-winning ball prevention function is output as the main It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. As a result, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation in which the game cannot be played due to the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function in this pachinko gaming machine PY1.

In step S3107, it is determined whether the non-erasing clear process shown in step S203 or the non-erasing clear process shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and information on the total number of fired balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c. It is determined whether or not the information on the number of differential balls present has been cleared. If the non-erasure clearing process is not being executed (NO in S3107), the process advances to step S3109. On the other hand, if the non-erasing clear process is being executed (YES in S3107), the reset outer end signal output process is executed (S3108), and the process advances to step S3109. In the reset outer edge signal output process (S3108), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of differential balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer edge signal") is transmitted from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. and is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the reset outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation in which the number of differential balls has been reset in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In addition, a dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an outer end signal for super prize ball notice, an outer end signal for super prize ball, and an outer end signal for stopping the game are transmitted. , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170.

9. Operation of production control microcomputer Next, the operation of production control microcomputer 121 will be explained based on FIGS. 50 to 52. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 are provided in the performance RAM 124.

[Sub-control main processing] When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 121 reads out the program for the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 50 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, first, power-on processing is performed in response to power-on (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for performance determination regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number update processing is completed, command transmission processing is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process (S4004), various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140. The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display screen 50a (performs various effects using the image) in accordance with the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 also outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various sound productions using audio), and performs lamp control. Through the circuit 151, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are made to emit light (to perform various light emitting effects by emitting light), and the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are actuated (to perform various movable body effects by movement). do) In this way, various performances (fluctuating performances, hold performances, movable body performances, operation performances, look-ahead performances, other preview performances, opening performances accompanying special games, open game performances, ending performances, customer waiting performances, performance modes) control, etc.) is realized.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output processing (S112) of the main control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt process] The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1 msec period is input to the production control board 120. In the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 51, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable body control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input processing (S4101), operations on operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the normal button detection switch 40a and the special button detection switch 41a, are detected, and a command is set or performance data is created according to the detection result. or In the light emission data output process (S4102), the frame lamp 53 and In order to cause a lamp such as the board lamp 54 to emit light, light emission data (lamp data) is referred to. Then, the lamp control circuit 151 is controlled based on the light emission data. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, etc. to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable body control process (S4103), the movable units 55, 56, and 58 are operated at predetermined timings based on the production data created in the input process (S4101), production data creation process (S4204), etc. described later. Refer to the drive data to perform the moving object performance. Then, the lamp control circuit 151 is controlled based on the drive data. That is, the production control microcomputer 121 operates the movable devices 55, 56, 58 in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. In the watchdog timer process (S4104), the watchdog timer is reset.

[10ms timer interrupt process] The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012), as shown in FIG. 52, received command analysis process (S4201), effect timer update process (S4202), audio control process (S4203), and effect data creation process (S4204) are sequentially performed. .

In the received command analysis process (S4201), the command stored in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124 by the receive interrupt process (S4010) is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command (for example, effect selection, effect mode setting, command set, etc.). In the effect timer update process (S4202), a timer for measuring time related to each effect is updated. For example, in the effect timer update process (S4202), the start timing and end timing of the valid operation period of the operation units such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process (S4203), based on the processing results of the input process (S4101) and the received command analysis process (S4201), audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and the audio control circuit 161 control is performed. In the performance data creation process (S4204), performance data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process (S4201).

Here, an example of processing when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the production control microcomputer 121 is a variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that a variation start command has been received in the received command analysis process (S4201), the production control microcomputer 121 performs variation based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the command as a process when receiving the variation start command. A production pattern (sub variation pattern) of the production is selected, information on the sub variation pattern is set, and a variation production start command including information on the sub variation pattern is set in the output buffer. For example, if the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is SP variation (variation pattern associated with SP reach), select a sub variation pattern that performs SP reach, and use the variation production start command corresponding to that sub variation pattern. set in the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), light emission data output process (S4102), movable body control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed to correspond to the selected sub fluctuation pattern. A fluctuating performance is realized. The processing flow for realizing such performances is basically the same for other performances such as performances associated with special games, customer waiting performances, look-ahead performances, so-called preview performances accompanying such fluctuations, and control of performance modes. It's the same.

10. Effects of the first embodiment As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game X or jackpot game Z in which the difference in the number of balls does not reach the reference number (80000), When the game ball enters the specific area 16, the first notification effect shown in FIG. 19 (B-1) is executed, and jackpot game X or jackpot game Z where the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the reference number is executed If the game ball enters the specific area 16 during the game, the first notification effect is not executed and the second notification effect shown in FIG. 19 (B-2) is executed. In this pachinko game machine PY1, the game cannot be executed after the jackpot game X or the jackpot game Z in which the difference in the number of balls exceeds the reference number. Therefore, if the game ball enters the specific area 16 and the first notification effect is performed during the execution of such jackpot game X or jackpot game Z, the player may This makes the player aware that the player will be in a high-probability, high-base gaming state that is advantageous.

Therefore, if the game ball enters the specific area 16 during the execution of jackpot game Alternatively, unlike the case where the jackpot game Z is being executed, the first notification performance is not executed. Therefore, before the game becomes impossible to execute, the player is not made aware that the high probability high base gaming state will be entered, and the player's feeling of regret is accelerated when the game becomes impossible to execute. can be prevented.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the high-probability, high-base gaming state is a gaming state in which special symbols are more likely to be stopped and displayed as jackpot symbols than in the low-probability, high-base gaming state (in other words, a gaming state in which the judgment result of the special symbol is more likely to result in a jackpot win). It is. Therefore, if a game ball enters the specific area 16 and the first notification effect is performed during the execution of jackpot game X or jackpot game Z in which the number of difference balls is equal to or greater than the reference number (80000), the game cannot be executed after that. Despite this, the game state is such that the special symbols are likely to be stopped and displayed as jackpot symbols, making the player expect further acquisition of the special game.

Therefore, if the game ball enters the specific area 16 during the execution of jackpot game X or jackpot game Z in which the number of difference balls is equal to or greater than the reference number (80000), the first notification effect will not be performed, so the game will not be executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being aware that he or she will be in a high-probability, high-base gaming state before the game becomes impossible.

11. Second Embodiment The second embodiment will be described below. In the description of the second embodiment, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

11-1. Jackpot Game First, the jackpot game of the second embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 53. A jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 53 is stored in the gaming ROM 103 of the second embodiment. The game control microcomputer 101 can execute a jackpot game using the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. The jackpot games of the second embodiment include "jackpot game 1,""jackpot game 2,""jackpot game 3," and "jackpot game 4," as shown in FIG. 53.

“Jackpot game 1” is a jackpot game that is executed when the result of jackpot judgment in the special figure 1 judgment process by the game control microcomputer 101 is “jackpot” and the result of jackpot symbol type judgment is “jackpot symbol 1”. be. In addition, the distribution rate of "jackpot symbol 1" in the special figure 1 determination process is "50%" (see FIG. 53). In "Jackpot Game 1", a round game is played six times. Each round game involves the opening of the first grand prize opening 14 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds.

“Jackpot game 2” is a jackpot game that is executed when the result of jackpot judgment in the special figure 1 judgment process by the game control microcomputer 101 is “jackpot” and the result of jackpot symbol type judgment is “jackpot symbol 2”. be. In addition, the distribution rate of "jackpot symbol 2" in the special figure 1 determination process is "50%" (see FIG. 53). In "Jackpot Game 2", like the above-mentioned "Jackpot Game 1", a round game involving opening of the first jackpot 14 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds is played six times.

“Jackpot game 3” is a jackpot game that is executed when the result of jackpot judgment in the special figure 2 judgment process by the game control microcomputer 101 is “jackpot” and the result of jackpot symbol type judgment is “jackpot symbol 3”. be. In addition, the distribution rate of "jackpot symbol 3" in the special figure 2 determination process is "65%" (see FIG. 53). In "Jackpot Game 3", a round game is played ten times in which the first jackpot 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds.

“Jackpot game 4” is a jackpot game that is executed when the result of jackpot judgment in the special figure 2 judgment process by the game control microcomputer 101 is “jackpot” and the result of jackpot symbol type judgment is “jackpot symbol 4”. be. In addition, the distribution rate of "jackpot symbol 4" in the special figure 2 determination process is "35%" (see FIG. 53). In "Jackpot Game 4", like the above-mentioned "Jackpot Game 3", a round game involving opening of the first jackpot 14 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds is played 10 times.

In the second embodiment, "Jackpot Game 3" and "Jackpot Game 4" in which the number of round games is 10 are better than "Jackpot Game 1" and "Jackpot Game 2" in which the number of round games is 6. This can be said to be a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. In other words, the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 3" is executed is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 2" is executed. Further, the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 4" is executed can be said to be a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 2" is executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, after the execution of "Jackpot Game 1", "Jackpot Game 2", "Jackpot Game 3", and "Jackpot Game 4", the gaming state is in a time saving state ("low probability high base gaming state" or " "High probability high base gaming state") (see FIG. 53).

After the execution of "Jackpot Game 1" and "Jackpot Game 3", the gaming state is set to a high probability state ("high probability high base gaming state") (see FIG. 53). However, in the second embodiment, the second big prize opening 15 is not opened in the round games of "Jackpot Game 1" and "Jackpot Game 3". That is, unlike the first embodiment, the setting to the high probability state after the jackpot game does not depend on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 within the second jackpot opening 15.

On the other hand, after the execution of "Jackpot Game 2" and "Jackpot Game 4", the gaming state is set to a low probability state ("low probability high base gaming state") (see FIG. 53).

In the second embodiment, the "high probability high base gaming state" can be continued until the next jackpot game is executed, and the "low probability high base gaming state" is such that the number of variable displays of special symbols is 100 times. It is possible to continue until the Therefore, "Jackpot Game 1" and "Jackpot Game 3" which are set to "high probability high base gaming state" after a jackpot game are "Jackpot Game 2" which is set to "low probability high base gaming state" after a jackpot game. It can be said that this is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot Game 4". In other words, the jackpot game state where "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" is executed can be said to be a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state where "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 4" is executed. .

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot", a predetermined number (the number In the second embodiment, three production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including the numbers "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", or "8") are set. A stop display (main stop display) is made on the display section 50a.

If the result of the jackpot symbol type determination in the special symbol 1 determination process is "jackpot symbol 1", one type of odd number (number When three production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 including "1", "3", "5" or "7" are permanently displayed in a row, and when one type of even number (number "2", There are times when three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including "4", "6", or "8" are permanently displayed as a set. On the other hand, in the case of "Jackpot symbol 2", instead of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 containing one kind of odd numbers, there are three production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 containing one kind of even numbers. This will appear when the book stops.

Therefore, in the special pattern variation performance that accompanies the variable display of special pattern 1, when the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are permanently displayed as a set of three including odd numbers, the player will receive "jackpot pattern 1". You can know that you have won. On the other hand, if the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed as a set of three including even numbers, the player cannot decide whether he has won "Jackpot Symbol 1" or "Jackpot Symbol 2". It's hard to judge.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot symbol type determination in the special symbol 2 determination process is "jackpot symbol 3", the special symbol variation performance accompanying the variable display of the special symbol 2 will include one type of odd number. There are times when performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in full stop as a set of three, and there are times when performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including one kind of even number are displayed as a complete stop display as a set of three. On the other hand, in the case of "jackpot symbol 4", performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including one kind of even number are displayed as a set of three in the main stop.

Therefore, in the same way as the special pattern variation effect accompanying the variable display of special figure 1, in the special figure variation effect accompanied by the variable display of special figure 2, the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 are arranged in sets of three including odd numbers. When the display is stopped, the player can understand that he has won the "jackpot symbol 3". On the other hand, when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed as a set of three including even numbers, the player cannot decide whether he has won "Jackpot Symbol 3" or "Jackpot Symbol 4". It's hard to judge.

11-2. Special Figure Variation Pattern Next, the special figure variation pattern that can be determined by the game control microcomputer 101 will be further explained based on FIGS. 54 and 55. The gaming ROM 103 of the second embodiment stores a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54 and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 uses the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. to determine the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, based on the jackpot determination result, the jackpot symbol type determination result, and the special figure variation pattern random number, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern. Which special figure variation pattern is determined depends on the special figure variation pattern random number.

Specifically, when the result of jackpot determination is "jackpot" in the non-time saving state and the result of jackpot symbol type determination is "jackpot symbol 1", the special symbol 1 variation pattern includes special symbol variation patterns "P21" to "P24". There are four types (see Figure 54).

The special figure variation pattern "P21" is a special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed after normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced effects. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the production symbols including odd numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3. Then, after the SP reach is executed, three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including the odd number are displayed in full stop. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P21” is called “1st SP jackpot fluctuation”.

The special figure variation pattern "P22" is a special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed through normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced effects. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the performance symbols including even numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3. Then, after the SP reach is executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including the even number are stopped and displayed in a row, and then the later-described symbol change effect is executed in the first mode. Thereafter, three identical performance symbols including odd numbers are permanently displayed in a row. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P22” is called “2nd SP jackpot fluctuation”.

The special figure variation pattern "P23" is a special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed after normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced effects. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the performance symbols including even numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3. Then, after the SP reach is executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 including the even number are stopped and displayed in a row, and then the later-described symbol change effect is executed in the second mode. Thereafter, three of the same performance symbols including even numbers are displayed in full stop. It should be noted that during the subsequent execution of the jackpot game 1, a promotion performance to be described later is executed in a successful manner. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P23” is called “3rd SP jackpot fluctuation”.

The special figure variation pattern "P24" is a special figure variation pattern in which N reach is performed through normal variation and reach. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the production symbols including odd numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3. After the N reach is executed, three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including the odd number are displayed in full stop. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P24” is called “1N jackpot fluctuation”.

In addition, when the result of jackpot determination is "Jackpot" in the non-time saving state and the result of jackpot symbol type determination is "Jackpot symbol 2", the special symbol 1 variation pattern includes special symbol variation patterns "P25" to "P26". There are two types (see Figure 54).

The special figure variation pattern "P25" is a special figure variation pattern in which the SP reach is performed after the normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced effects, like the above-mentioned "P23". However, it differs from the above-mentioned "P23" in that during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game 2, the promotion effect described later is executed in a failed manner. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P25” is called “4th SP jackpot fluctuation”.

The special figure variation pattern "P26" is a special figure variation pattern in which N reach is performed through normal variation and reach. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the performance symbols including even numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3. Then, after the N reach is executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 including the even number are stopped and displayed in a row, and then the later-described symbol change effect is executed in the second mode. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P26” is called “2N jackpot fluctuation”.

In addition, in the non-time saving state, when the result of jackpot judgment is "Lose" and the result of reach judgment is "Reach", the special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern includes 2 of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "P27" to "P28". There are different types (see Figure 54).

The special figure variation pattern "P27" is a special figure 1 variation pattern corresponding to the "loss" of the above-mentioned "P21" to "P23" and "P25". That is, SP reach is performed through normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced performance, and then performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss. In the reach of this special pattern fluctuation pattern, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are the same among the performance symbols containing odd numbers, or the same among the performance symbols containing even numbers. A temporary stop is displayed. This special figure fluctuation pattern "P27" is called "1st SP loss fluctuation".

The special figure variation pattern "P28" is a special figure 1 variation pattern corresponding to the "loss" of the above-mentioned "P24" and "P26". That is, the N reach is performed through the normal variation and the reach, and then the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss. In the reach of this special pattern fluctuation pattern, as with "P24" above, the same production symbols containing odd numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left production symbol EZ1 and right production symbol EZ3, or as in the above "P26". Similarly, the same effect patterns including even numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3. This special figure fluctuation pattern "P28" is called "1st N loss fluctuation".

In the time saving state, when the result of jackpot judgment is "Jackpot" and the result of jackpot symbol type judgment is "Jackpot symbol 3", there are four types of special pattern fluctuation patterns "P61" to "P64" in the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern. Yes (see Figure 55).

The special figure variation pattern "P61" is a special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed after normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced effects. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the production symbols including odd numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3. Then, after the SP reach is executed, three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including the odd number are displayed in full stop. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P61” is called “5th SP jackpot fluctuation”.

The special figure variation pattern "P62" is a special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed after normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced effects. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the performance symbols including even numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3. Then, after the SP reach is executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including the even number are stopped and displayed in a row, and then the later-described symbol change effect is executed in the first mode. Thereafter, three identical performance symbols including odd numbers are permanently displayed in a row. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P62” is called “6th SP jackpot fluctuation”.

The special figure variation pattern "P63" is a special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed after normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced effects. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the performance symbols including even numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3. Then, after the SP reach is executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 including the even number are stopped and displayed in a row, and then the later-described symbol change effect is executed in the second mode. Thereafter, three of the same performance symbols including even numbers are displayed in full stop. Incidentally, during the subsequent execution of the jackpot game 3, a promotion performance to be described later is executed in a successful manner. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P63” is called “7th SP jackpot fluctuation”.

The special figure variation pattern "P64" is a special figure variation pattern in which N reach is performed through normal variation and reach. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the production symbols including odd numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3. After the N reach is executed, three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 including the odd number are displayed in full stop. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P64” is called “3N jackpot fluctuation”.

In addition, when the result of jackpot determination is "jackpot" and the result of jackpot symbol type determination is "jackpot symbol 4" in the time saving state, the special symbol 2 variation pattern includes 2 of the special symbol variation patterns "P65" to "P66". There are different types (see Figure 55).

The special figure variation pattern "P65" is a special figure variation pattern in which the SP reach is performed after the normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced effects, like the above-mentioned "P63". However, it differs from the above "P63" in that during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game 4, the promotion effect described later is executed in a failed manner. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P65” is called “8th SP jackpot fluctuation”.

The special figure variation pattern "P66" is a special figure variation pattern in which N reach is performed through normal variation and reach. In the reach of this special symbol variation pattern, the same one of the performance symbols including even numbers is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3. Then, after the N reach is executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 including the even number are stopped and displayed in a row, and then the later-described symbol change effect is executed in the second mode. This special figure fluctuation pattern “P66” is called “4N jackpot fluctuation”.

In addition, in the time saving state, when the result of jackpot judgment is "Lose" and the result of reach judgment is "Reach", there are two types of special pattern 2 variation patterns: "P67" to "P68". (See Figure 55).

The special figure variation pattern "P67" is a special figure 2 variation pattern corresponding to the "loss" of the above-mentioned "P61" to "P63" and "P65". That is, SP reach is performed through normal variation, reach, N reach, and advanced performance, and then performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss. In the reach of this special pattern fluctuation pattern, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are the same among the performance symbols containing odd numbers, or the same among the performance symbols containing even numbers. A temporary stop is displayed. This special figure fluctuation pattern "P67" is called "2nd SP loss fluctuation".

The special figure variation pattern "P68" is a special figure 2 variation pattern corresponding to the "loss" of the above-mentioned "P64" and "P66". That is, the N reach is performed through the normal variation and the reach, and then the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss. In the reach of this special pattern fluctuation pattern, as with "P64" above, the same production symbols including odd numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left production symbol EZ1 and right production symbol EZ3, or as in the above "P66". Similarly, the same effect patterns including even numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3. This special figure fluctuation pattern "P68" is called "2nd N loss fluctuation".

FIG. 56 shows the distribution rate (execution probability) of the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table (FIG. 54) in the non-time saving state. In the second embodiment, in a non-time saving state, when the result of jackpot determination is "jackpot" and the result of jackpot symbol type determination is "jackpot symbol 1", the game control microcomputer 101 is operated as shown in FIG. 56(A). The special pattern fluctuation pattern is determined by the distribution rate. In addition, in the non-time saving state, when the result of jackpot determination is "jackpot" and the result of jackpot symbol type determination is "jackpot symbol 2", the game control microcomputer 101 uses the distribution rate shown in FIG. 56(B). Determine the special figure fluctuation pattern. Furthermore, in the non-time-saving state, if the jackpot determination result is "lose" and the reach determination result is "reach", the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special symbol at the distribution rate shown in FIG. 56(C). Decide on a pattern.

According to FIG. 56(A), the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern “P21” is “20%”, the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern “P22” is “40%”, and the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern “P22” is “40%”. The distribution rate value of the figure variation pattern "P23" is "35%", which is both larger than the distribution rate value ("5%") of the special figure variation pattern "P24". Therefore, if the judgment result in the special pattern 1 variation pattern judgment process is "jackpot" and "jackpot symbol 1", the SP reach will be reached through N reach, rather than the special pattern 1 variation pattern which is only performed up to N reach. The special figure 1 variation pattern in which this occurs is more likely to be selected.

In addition, the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern "P22" is "40%", which is higher than the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern "P23", and the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern "P21". It is larger than the value of the fraction (see FIG. 56(A)). Therefore, when the result of the judgment in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process is "jackpot" and "jackpot symbol 1", the special figure variation pattern "P22" is most likely to be selected, followed by the special figure variation pattern "P23". is the most likely to be selected, followed by the special figure variation pattern "P21", and the special figure variation pattern "P24" is the least likely to be selected.

On the other hand, according to FIG. 56(C), the distribution rate of the special pattern fluctuation pattern "P27" which is the special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern for "loss" of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "P21" to "P23" and "P25" The value of is "25%". This value is smaller than the distribution rate value (75%) of the special pattern fluctuation pattern "P28", which is the special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern for "loss" of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "P24" and "P26". . Therefore, if the result of the judgment in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process is "lose", the special figure 1 variation pattern that is executed only up to N reach is better than the special figure 1 variation pattern in which SP reach is executed after N reach. It is easier to select than the 1 variation pattern.

As a result of the above, the player can expect to execute the subsequent jackpot game 1 and jackpot game 2 when the N reach develops into the SP reach, rather than when the N reach develops into the SP reach.

FIG. 57 shows the distribution rate (execution probability) of the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table (FIG. 55) in the time saving state. In the second embodiment, in the time saving state, when the result of jackpot determination is "jackpot" and the result of jackpot symbol type determination is "jackpot symbol 3", the game control microcomputer 101 performs the shake shown in FIG. 57(A). The special figure fluctuation pattern is determined by the fraction. In addition, in the time saving state, when the result of jackpot determination is "jackpot" and the result of jackpot symbol type determination is "jackpot symbol 4", the game control microcomputer 101 specifies the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57(B). Determine the figure fluctuation pattern. Furthermore, in the time saving state, if the result of the jackpot determination is "lose" and the result of the reach determination is "reach", the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special symbol fluctuation pattern at the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57(C). Determine.

According to FIG. 57(A), the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern “P61” is “40%”, the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern “P62” is “25%”, and the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern “P62” is “25%”. The distribution rate value of the figure variation pattern "P63" is "20%", which is both larger than the distribution rate value ("15%") of the special figure variation pattern "P64". Therefore, if the judgment result in the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process is "jackpot" and "jackpot symbol 3", SP reach will be reached through N reach, rather than the special figure 2 variation pattern which is only performed up to N reach. The special figure 2 variation pattern in which this occurs is more likely to be selected.

In addition, the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern "P61" is "40%", which is higher than the value of the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern "P62", and the distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern "P63". It is larger than the value of the fraction (see FIG. 57(A)). Therefore, when the judgment result in the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process is "jackpot" and "jackpot symbol 3", the special figure variation pattern "P61" is most likely to be selected, followed by the special figure variation pattern "P62". is the most likely to be selected, followed by the special figure variation pattern "P63", and the special figure variation pattern "P64" is the most difficult to select.

On the other hand, according to FIG. 57(C), the distribution rate of the special pattern fluctuation pattern "P67" which is the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern for "loss" of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "P61" to "P63" and "P65" The value of is "25%". This value is smaller than the distribution rate value (75%) of the special pattern fluctuation pattern "P68", which is the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern for the "loss" of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "P64" and "P66". . Therefore, if the result of the judgment in the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process is "lose", the special figure 2 variation pattern that is executed only up to N reach is better than the special figure 2 variation pattern in which SP reach is executed after N reach. This pattern is easier to select than the 2-variation pattern.

As described above, the player can expect to execute the subsequent jackpot game 3 and jackpot game 4 when the N reach develops into the SP reach, rather than when the N reach develops into the SP reach.

11-3. Various Effects Next, various effects in the second embodiment will be further explained. The production control microcomputer 121 of the second embodiment can execute a symbol change production in a special symbol variation production. Further, promotion performance can be executed in the jackpot performance mode.

11-3-1. Special Figure Variation Effect First, the special figure variation effect of the second embodiment will be explained. In the special symbol variation effect, three effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner on the display section 50a. These performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 change with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and stop with the end of the variable display of the special symbol. That is, during the special figure fluctuation time of the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is performed, and then the stop display (main stop display) of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is performed. Then, the result of the jackpot determination (special drawing lottery) is notified by stopping display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3.

In the second embodiment, the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 may be performed before the actual stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3. The temporary stop display is, for example, a swinging fluctuation display of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3, or a short-time stationary display before the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 are changed again. Unlike the main stop display, the temporary stop display of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 does not necessarily notify the result of the special drawing lottery.

Furthermore, in the special symbol variation performance, three small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed in variation on the display section 50a. These small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3, like the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3, change with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and stop with the end of the variable display of the special symbol. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3. However, unlike the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, there is no temporary stop display in the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3.

The effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 of the second embodiment each have eight different types of effect patterns. Furthermore, there are eight types of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 corresponding to the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, respectively. Specifically, the designs include the number "1" (performance design, small design), the number "2" (performance design, small design), the number "3" (performance design, small design), Designs that include the number ``4'' (performance design, small design), design that includes the number ``5'' (performance design, small design), design that includes the number ``6'' (performance design, small design), number ``7'' There are symbols including the number "8" (production symbols, small symbols), and symbols including the number "8" (production symbols, small symbols). These designs (production designs, small designs) include designs that include the number "1", designs that include the number "2", images that include the number "3", designs that include the number "4", and designs that include the number "5". , symbols including the number "6", symbols including the number "7", and symbols including the number "8" are arranged in this order. Then, the symbol containing the number "8" is followed by the symbol containing the number "1".

In addition, in the second embodiment, a pattern including the number "1" (performance pattern, small pattern), a pattern including the number "3" (performance pattern, small pattern), a pattern including the number "5" (performance pattern, small pattern), Symbols), and symbols containing the number "7" (performance symbols, small symbols) are also particularly referred to as symbols containing odd numbers (performance symbols, small symbols). On the other hand, there are patterns including the number ``2'' (performance patterns, small patterns), patterns including the number ``4'' (performance patterns, small patterns), patterns including the number ``6'' (performance patterns, small patterns), and , A pattern including the number "8" (performance pattern, small pattern) is also called a pattern including an even number (performance pattern, small pattern).

Furthermore, there are eight types of stopping modes that suggest a jackpot in the second embodiment. Specifically, "1.1.1", "2.2.2", "3.3.3", "4.4.4", "5.5.5", "6.6.6" ”, “7.7.7” and “8.8.8”, there are stopping modes in which the left-center right symbols (performance symbols, small symbols) are the same (a set of three).

Further, in the second embodiment, the result of the special drawing lottery is suggested to the player depending on the type of symbols forming a three-set stopping pattern. Specifically, if the final stop pattern is a set of three odd-numbered symbols such as "1, 1, 1", "3, 3, 3", "5, 5, 5", or "7, 7, 7". For example, it is suggested to the player that the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot with jackpot symbol 1 or jackpot symbol 3. On the other hand, if the final stop pattern is a set of three even-numbered symbols such as "2, 2, 2", "4, 4, 4", "6, 6, 6", or "8, 8, 8" , suggests the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot with jackpot symbol 2 or jackpot symbol 4, and a possibility of a jackpot with jackpot symbol 1 or jackpot symbol 3.

11-3-2. Reach "Reach" is a performance in which the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same performance symbol after the above-mentioned normal fluctuation on the display section 50a. In "reach", there are cases where the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same odd numbered symbol, and there are cases where the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same even numbered symbol.

In the special pattern variation performance of special pattern 1, if the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 move to the reach of the same odd numbered pattern, the player is made to expect that he may win the jackpot, and It is possible to make the player aware that the type of jackpot is jackpot symbol 1. In addition, in the special pattern variation effect of special pattern 1, if the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 move to the reach of the same even numbered pattern, the player is made to expect that he may win the jackpot. At the same time, it is possible to make the player aware that the type of jackpot is jackpot symbol 1 or jackpot symbol 2.

The special pattern variation performance of special pattern 2 is also the same as the special pattern variation performance of special pattern 1 above, if the left production pattern EZ1 and right production pattern EZ3 move to the reach of the same odd numbered pattern, it will be a jackpot. It is possible to make the player expect that he may win, and to make the player aware that the type of jackpot is jackpot symbol 3. In addition, in the special pattern variation effect of special pattern 2, if the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 move to the reach of the same even number pattern, the player is made to expect that he may win the jackpot. At the same time, it is possible to make the player aware that the type of jackpot is jackpot symbol 3 or jackpot symbol 4.

11-3-3. Temporary stop display and stop display of performance symbols At the final stage of the special symbol variation performance "SP Reach", three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are all temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, even in the final stage of "N reach" which does not progress to "SP reach", all three effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, after being temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, all of the three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

Specifically, for example, in the SP reach of the second embodiment, after the N reach shown in FIG. The final phase of the SP reach-only performance as shown in (A) (and FIG. 22(B)) is reached. In the case of the special pattern fluctuation patterns "P22", "P23", and "P25", as shown in FIG. At the same time, performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed as a set of three identical even-numbered symbols.

If the symbol change effect described later is not executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 58(C). The small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. On the other hand, when the symbol change effect is executed, after being temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, before the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are stopped and displayed, the symbols shown in FIGS. 59(D) and 59(E) , a later-described symbol change effect shown in FIG. 59 (F-1) or FIG. 59 (F-2) is executed. After the symbol change effect is executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are all stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 59 (G-1) or FIG. 59 (G-2). That will happen.

11-3-4. Symbol Change Effect Next, the symbol change effect in the second embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 59. This symbol change performance is a performance in which performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, which are once temporarily stopped and displayed as a set of three identical even-numbered symbols, can be changed to a set of three identical odd-numbered symbols. This symbol change effect has a first mode and a second mode. The first mode refers to the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ2, which are temporarily stopped and displayed as a set of three of the same odd numbered symbols, from the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3, which are temporarily stopped and displayed as a set of three of the same odd numbered symbols. , EZ3. On the other hand, the second mode is a performance mode in which the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, which are temporarily stopped and displayed as a set of three identical even-numbered symbols, do not change. As described above, if the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 form a set of three identical odd-numbered symbols, the winning of jackpot symbol 1 (or jackpot symbol 3) is confirmed. Therefore, by the symbol change production, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3, which are temporarily stopped and displayed as a set of three identical even-numbered symbols, become the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1 (or jackpot symbol 3). It is possible to make players expect that the game will change.

In the second embodiment, the symbol change effect is during SP reach with special symbol variation patterns "P22", "P23", "P25", "P62", "P63", "P65", or special symbol variation pattern It is executed during N reach at "P26" and "P66".

In this symbol change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 59(D), a display effect (first A partial performance) will be performed. This first partial performance is performed in a state where the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed as a set of three even-numbered symbols.

As described above, the jackpot symbol 1 (or jackpot symbol 3) is a jackpot symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot symbol 2 (or jackpot symbol 4). Therefore, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, people tend to think that jackpot symbol 1 (or jackpot symbol 3) is preferable to jackpot symbol 2 (or jackpot symbol 4) as the jackpot type. Therefore, by executing the first partial performance described above, it is possible to make the player who thought that he would win the jackpot of jackpot symbol 2 (or jackpot symbol 4) expect it.

Subsequently, a display effect (second partial effect) using an image G122 indicating "blackout" as shown in FIG. 59(E) is performed. As a result, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are being temporarily stopped and displayed disappear from the display section 50a, making it possible to surprise the players who were paying attention to the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3. There is. Furthermore, by executing the second partial performance, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily disappear from the display section 50a, so that the player's attention is drawn to the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are redisplayed on the display section 50a. It is now possible.

In the symbol change performance in the first mode, as shown in FIG. 59 (F-1), the final display performance is a display performance in which the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped as a set of three odd-numbered symbols (for example, "7"). (Third part performance) is performed. After such symbol change performance, as shown in FIG. 59 (G-1), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the three odd-numbered symbols, and the special symbol variation performance ends. . On the other hand, in the symbol change performance in the second mode, as shown in FIG. The third part performance) will be performed. After such a symbol change performance, as shown in FIG. 59 (G-2), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the three even-numbered symbols, and the special symbol variation performance ends. .

11-3-5. Jackpot performance mode In the jackpot performance mode of the second embodiment, promotion performance can be executed during the execution of the first round game in the jackpot game.

As mentioned above, when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed as a set of three including even numbers, it is possible to determine whether the jackpot symbol 1 (or jackpot symbol 3) has been won or whether the jackpot symbol 2 (or jackpot symbol 2) has been won. It is difficult for the player to judge whether symbol 4) has been won. In other words, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the jackpot game being executed is jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) or jackpot game 2 (or jackpot game 4). Therefore, by executing the promotion effect, it becomes possible for the player to understand whether the winning symbol is jackpot symbol 1 (or jackpot symbol 3) or jackpot symbol 2 (or jackpot symbol 4). There is. Specifically, is the jackpot game being executed jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the subsequent game state will be a high-probability high-base game state, or is it a low-probability high-base game state as the subsequent game state? It is possible for the player to understand whether the jackpot game 2 (or the jackpot game 4) will result in the following.

The promotion performance of the second embodiment is executed when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are permanently displayed as a set of three including even numbers in the immediately preceding special symbol variation performance. If performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are permanently displayed as a set of three including odd numbers in the immediately preceding special figure variation performance, no promotion performance will be performed in the subsequent jackpot game.

There are success modes and failure modes in the promotion performance. The success mode is a performance mode that is executed when the jackpot game being executed is jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3). On the other hand, the failure mode is a performance mode that is executed when the jackpot game being executed is jackpot game 2 (or jackpot game 4).

In the promotion effect, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a display effect (fourth partial effect) using a character image G120 consisting of a head and a dialogue image G141 indicating a character string "promotion effect" in a speech bubble is displayed. will be held. This fourth partial effect starts to be executed at the same time as the first round game of the jackpot game starts.

Subsequently, a display effect (fifth partial effect) using an image G122 indicating "blackout" as shown in FIG. 60(B) is performed. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display section 50a, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the subsequent development of the performance.

In the promotion performance in the success mode, as shown in FIG. 60 (C-1), a display performance (sixth part performance) is performed. Thereby, the player can understand that the jackpot game being executed is jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) rather than jackpot game 2 (or jackpot game 4). On the other hand, in the promotion effect in the failure mode, a display effect (sixth partial effect) using the character image G120 and a dialogue image G143 indicating the character string "promotion failure" in a speech bubble is performed. Thereby, the player can understand that the jackpot game being executed is jackpot game 2 (or jackpot game 4). The execution of the promotion performance ends at the same time as the first round game in the jackpot game ends.

11-4. Flow of production Next, we will explain the execution of various productions when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot win and the difference in the number of balls in the jackpot game is equal to or greater than the standard number (80,000) and when the standard number is not reached. , will be explained using FIGS. 54, 55, 59, and 60. In the second embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 121 refers to the difference number of balls at the start of execution of a special figure fluctuation performance whose jackpot determination result is a jackpot win, and refers to the difference number of balls during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game. Determine whether or not the number is greater than or equal to the reference number.

Specifically, if the special figure variation effect that is about to start execution indicates the jackpot winning of the jackpot symbol 1, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the main control at the timing when the execution of this special figure variation effect starts. It is determined whether the number of difference balls (information on the number of difference balls) stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c of the board 100 is equal to or greater than 79100 (900 less than the reference number). If the difference number of balls at that timing is 79,100 or more, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference number of balls becomes equal to or more than the reference number during the subsequent execution of jackpot game 1 (jackpot game corresponding to jackpot symbol 1). do. On the other hand, when the difference number of balls is less than 79,100, it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the reference number during the subsequent execution of jackpot game 1.

In addition, if the special figure variation effect that is about to start execution indicates the jackpot winning of the jackpot symbol 3, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the main control board 100 at the timing when the execution of this special figure variation effect starts. It is determined whether the number of difference balls (information on the number of difference balls) stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c is 78500 (a number 1500 less than the reference number) or more. If the difference number of balls at that timing is 78,500 or more, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference number of balls becomes more than the reference number during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game 3 (jackpot game corresponding to jackpot symbol 3). do. On the other hand, if the difference number of balls is less than 78,500, it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the reference number during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game 3.

If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls does not reach the standard number during the execution of the jackpot games (jackpot game 1, jackpot game 3) that are performed after the special symbol fluctuation performance that indicates jackpot winning, Various effects in the effect flow of the special figure variation effect shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 are executed.

Specifically, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference number of balls does not reach the reference number during the execution of the jackpot game 1 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P21", the production control microcomputer 121 executes the special figure variation pattern "P21". As the special figure variation performance, SP reach is executed through the performance flow shown in FIG. 54, that is, normal variation, reach using the same performance pattern including odd numbers, N reach, and advanced performance.

In addition, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls does not reach the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 1 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P22", the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special figure variation pattern "P22". As a figure variation effect, after the effect flow shown in FIG. 54, that is, normal variation, reach using the same effect pattern including even numbers, N reach, and SP reach after advanced effect, the figure change effect in the first mode. Execute.

In addition, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls does not reach the reference number during the execution of the jackpot game 1 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P23", the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the special figure variation pattern "P23". As the figure variation effect, after the effect flow shown in Figure 54, that is, the normal variation, the reach using the same effect pattern including even numbers, the N reach, and the SP reach after the development effect, the pattern change effect in the second mode. Execute. Then, during the subsequent execution of the jackpot game 1, promotion performance is performed in a successful manner.

In addition, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls does not reach the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 1 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P24", the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special figure variation pattern "P24". As the figure variation effect, N reach is executed through the effect flow shown in FIG. 54, that is, normal variation and reach using the same effect pattern including odd numbers.

In addition, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls does not reach the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 3 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P61", the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special figure variation pattern "P61". As the figure variation effect, SP reach is executed through the effect flow shown in FIG. 55, that is, normal variation, reach using the same effect pattern including odd numbers, N reach, and advanced effect.

In addition, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls does not reach the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 3 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P62", the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special figure variation pattern "P62". As a figure variation effect, after the effect flow shown in FIG. 55, that is, normal variation, reach using the same effect pattern including even numbers, N reach, and SP reach through advanced effects, the pattern change effect in the first mode. Execute.

In addition, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference number of balls does not reach the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 3 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P63", the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the special figure variation pattern "P63". As the figure variation effect, after the effect flow shown in Figure 55, that is, the normal variation, the reach using the same effect pattern including even numbers, the N reach, and the SP reach after the development effect, the pattern change effect in the second mode. Execute. Then, during the subsequent execution of the jackpot game 3, promotion performance is performed in a successful manner.

In addition, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls does not reach the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 3 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P64", the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special figure variation pattern "P64". As the figure variation effect, N reach is executed through the effect flow shown in FIG. 55, that is, normal variation and reach using the same effect pattern including odd numbers.

On the other hand, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or greater than the standard number during the execution of the jackpot games (jackpot game 1, jackpot game 3) that are performed after the special symbol fluctuation performance that indicates jackpot winning, is executed by partially changing the production flow of the special symbol variation production shown in FIGS. 54 and 55.

Specifically, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number during the execution of the jackpot game 1 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P21", the performance control microcomputer 121 performs the following according to the special figure variation pattern "P21". As a special figure variation performance, instead of the reach using the same performance pattern including odd numbers in the performance flow shown in FIG. 55, a reach using the same performance pattern including even numbers is performed. Furthermore, after the SP reach through the N reach and the development performance, the symbol change performance in the second mode is executed. In other words, unlike the case where it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the standard number, the performance control microcomputer 121 switches to reach using the same performance symbols including even numbers instead of odd numbers, and further changes the number of symbols in the second mode. Execute a special figure variation effect that includes a change effect.

In addition, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or greater than the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 1 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P22", the special figure according to the special figure variation pattern "P22" As a variation performance, a symbol change performance in the second mode is performed in place of the symbol change performance in the first mode of the production flow shown in FIG. Then, during the subsequent execution of the jackpot game 1, a promotion performance is performed in a failure mode. In other words, unlike the case where it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the reference number, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes a special symbol variation performance that switches to a symbol change performance in the second mode instead of the first mode, Furthermore, during the subsequent execution of the jackpot game 1, promotion performance in a failure mode is added.

In addition, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls will be equal to or greater than the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 1 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P23", the special figure according to the special figure variation pattern "P23" Similar to the case where it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the standard number, the variation production is the production flow shown in Fig. 55, that is, normal variation, reach using the same production pattern including even numbers, N reach, and development production. After the SP reach through , the symbol change effect in the second mode is executed. However, during the subsequent execution of the jackpot game 1, a promotion effect in a failure mode is performed instead of a promotion effect in a success mode. In other words, unlike the case where it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the standard number, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes a promotion performance that switches to a failure mode instead of a success mode during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game 1. do.

In addition, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number during the execution of the jackpot game 1 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P24", the special figure according to the special figure variation pattern "P24" As a variable performance, instead of the reach using the same performance pattern including odd numbers in the performance flow shown in FIG. 55, a reach using the same performance pattern including even numbers is performed. In other words, unlike the case where it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the standard number, the production control microcomputer 121 executes a special symbol variation production that switches to reach using the same production pattern including even numbers instead of odd numbers. .

In addition, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls will be equal to or greater than the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 3 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P61", the special figure according to the special figure variation pattern "P61" As a variable performance, instead of the reach using the same performance pattern including odd numbers in the performance flow shown in FIG. 56, a reach using the same performance pattern including even numbers is performed. Furthermore, after the SP reach through the N reach and the development performance, the symbol change performance in the second mode is executed. In other words, unlike the case where it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the standard number, the performance control microcomputer 121 switches to reach using the same performance symbols including even numbers instead of odd numbers, and further changes the number of symbols in the second mode. Execute a special figure variation effect that includes a change effect.

In addition, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or greater than the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 3 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P62", the special figure according to the special figure variation pattern "P62" As a variation performance, a symbol change performance in the second mode is performed in place of the symbol change performance in the first mode of the production flow shown in FIG. Then, during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game 3, a promotion performance is performed in a failure mode. In other words, unlike the case where it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the reference number, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes a special symbol variation performance that switches to a symbol change performance in the second mode instead of the first mode, Furthermore, during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game 3, promotion performance in a failure mode is added.

In addition, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or greater than the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 3 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P63", the special figure according to the special figure variation pattern "P63" Similar to the case where it is determined that the number of difference balls does not reach the standard number, the variation production is the production flow shown in Figure 56, that is, normal variation, reach using the same production pattern including even numbers, N reach, and development production. After the SP reach through , the symbol change effect in the second mode is executed. However, during the subsequent execution of the jackpot game 3, a promotion effect in a failure mode is performed instead of a promotion effect in a success mode. In other words, unlike the case where it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the standard number, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes a promotion performance that switches to a failure mode instead of a success mode during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game 3. do.

In addition, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls will be equal to or greater than the standard number during the execution of the jackpot game 3 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern "P64", the special figure according to the special figure variation pattern "P64" As a variable performance, instead of the reach using the same performance pattern including odd numbers in the performance flow shown in FIG. 56, a reach using the same performance pattern including even numbers is performed. In other words, unlike the case where it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the standard number, the production control microcomputer 121 executes a special symbol variation production that switches to reach using the same production pattern including even numbers instead of odd numbers. .

11-5. Effects of the Second Embodiment As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the second embodiment, the game becomes impossible to execute after a jackpot game in which the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the reference number (80000). . Therefore, if such a jackpot game is jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3), it is a high-probability high-base game that is in an advantageous gaming state for the player, even though the game becomes impossible to execute after that. This makes the player aware of the situation.

Therefore, when jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the standard number is played, there is a case in which jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls does not reach the reference number is played. is different from that, before the execution of jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3), the special pattern fluctuation effect in which the production symbols stop and display on odd numbered zeros (a set of three) is not executed, and instead of A special pattern variation effect is performed in which the effect pattern is stopped and displayed when the pattern is aligned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that an advantageous gaming state (high-probability, high-base gaming state) will be reached before the game becomes impossible to execute, and the player's regret when the game becomes impossible to execute is prevented. It is possible to prevent your feelings from getting worse.

In addition, when jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the standard number is played, there is a case in which jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls does not reach the reference number is played. However, before the execution of the jackpot game 1 (or the jackpot game 3), the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at an even number of zeros, as in the case where the jackpot game 2 (or jackpot game 4) is played. Therefore, when jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the standard number is played, the player is more reliably informed that the game will be in an advantageous gaming state before the game becomes impossible to execute. You can make it unconscious.

In addition, when jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the standard number is played, there is a case in which jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls does not reach the reference number is played. This is different from the special pattern in which the design is temporarily stopped and displayed at an even number of zeros (a set of three), then the design change performance is not performed in the first mode, and the design is stopped and displayed at an even number of zeros (a set of three). A variable performance is executed. Therefore, when jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the standard number is played, the even-numbered double (all threes) before jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) is played. By the special symbol variation performance in which the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to more surely prevent the player from being aware that an advantageous game state will be reached before the game becomes impossible to execute.

In addition, when jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the standard number is being played, jackpot game 1 (or jackpot game 3) in which the difference in the number of balls does not reach the reference number is being played. Unlike the case where the promotion is successful, the promotion effect is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the game will be in an advantageous gaming state before the game becomes impossible to play, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed when the game becomes impossible to play. It becomes.

12. Third Embodiment A third embodiment will be described below. In the description of the third embodiment, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

12-1. Jackpot Game First, of the configuration of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the third embodiment, the jackpot game played by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described using FIG. 61(A). The pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment has three types of jackpot games: "first jackpot game,""second jackpot game," and "third jackpot game" shown in the jackpot game control table in FIG. 61(A). be.

The "first jackpot game" is a jackpot game that then becomes a "high base gaming state" and continues until four round games are completed. The first big prize opening 14 is opened in any round game.

The "second jackpot game" is a jackpot game that subsequently becomes a "high base gaming state", similar to the first jackpot game. However, unlike the first jackpot game, the game continues until the 10th round game is completed. The first big prize opening 14 is opened in any round game.

The "third jackpot game" is a jackpot game that subsequently becomes a "high base gaming state", similar to the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game. Also, like the first jackpot game, the game continues until the four round games are completed. The first big prize opening 14 is opened in any round game.

In the jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, and third jackpot game) of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61(A), after the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped, the jackpot game When execution starts, a jackpot opening (jackpot OP) is first set. The jackpot OP continues until a predetermined time (in this embodiment, the "OP time" of 3.0 seconds shown in FIG. 61(A)) has elapsed, and when the jackpot OP ends, the first round of the round game starts. be done. In the round game, the first big prize opening 14 is opened until a predetermined time (in this embodiment, the "opening time" of 29.5 seconds shown in FIG. ) continues until the game ball enters the first grand prize opening 14.

When the first round game ends, an inter-round interval (round IT) is set. The round IT continues until a predetermined time (in this embodiment, the "closing time" of 2.0 seconds shown in FIG. 61(A)) has elapsed, and when the round IT ends, the second round of the round game starts. be done. Then, when the final round game (the 4th round game for the 1st jackpot game, the 4th round game for the 3rd jackpot game, the 10th round game for the 2nd jackpot game) ends, the jackpot ending (jackpot ED) will be played. Set. The jackpot ED continues until a predetermined time (in this embodiment, the "ED time" of 5.0 seconds shown in FIG. 61(A)) has elapsed, and one jackpot game ends when the jackpot ED ends. .

12-2. Small Win Game Next, the small win game played by this pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 61(B). As shown in FIG. 61(B), the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of playing a small winning game as a game different from a jackpot game. There are two types of small winning games of this embodiment: "first small winning game" and "second small winning game" shown in the small winning game control table of FIG. 61(B).

In both the first small winning game and the second small winning game, as shown in FIG. 61(B), first, an initial game is performed in which the second large prize opening 15 is opened once (one round). If the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (see FIG. 3) in the second big prize opening 15 during the execution of this first game, the first big prize will be played in an opening pattern according to the type of small win that has been won. A "2nd type jackpot game" in which the prize opening 14 is opened is executed. The type 2 jackpot game is a jackpot game executed based on passing to the specific area 16, and is distinguished from the "type 1 jackpot game" executed based on the result of jackpot determination being a jackpot win. In the small winning game of this embodiment, in addition to the first game, a second type jackpot game can be executed.

If the small winning game is the first small winning game and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big prize opening 15 during the execution of the first game, it will be considered as the second type jackpot game after the execution of the first game. , a round game from the 2nd round 3rd (2R) to the 4th round (4R) as shown in FIG. 61(B) is played. In addition, even if the small winning game is the second small winning game, if the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second large prize opening 15 during the execution of the first game, the second small winning game will be held after the first game is executed. A seed jackpot game is played. However, the second type jackpot game at that time is a round game from the second round (2R) to the tenth round (10R) as shown in FIG. 61(B). Regardless of whether it is the first small winning game or the second small winning game, when the execution of the second type jackpot game is completed, the "high base gaming state" is set as the subsequent gaming state.

In addition, in both the first small winning game and the second small winning game, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 in the second big prize opening 15 during the execution of the first game, only the execution of the first game Then, the execution of the small winning game ends. When the execution of the small winning game ends in this manner, the gaming state before the execution of the small winning game is set as the subsequent gaming state. That is, in that case, the game returns to the gaming state before the execution of the small winning game.

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, a jackpot determination is made with reference to the "jackpot random number value" and the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 62(A). Specifically, in the jackpot determination of the first special figure, it is determined whether the jackpot random number value matches any of "65330" to "65535" shown in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 62(A)). If the jackpot random number matches any one of "65330" to "65535", the result of the jackpot determination is determined to be a jackpot win, but if they do not match, the result of the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss. In this embodiment, in this case, the losing A symbol is displayed on the display devices 8 as the stop display mode of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in the jackpot determination of the second special drawing, it is first determined whether the jackpot random number value matches any of "65330" to "65535" shown in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 62(A)). If the jackpot random number matches any of "65330" to "65535", the jackpot determination result will be considered a jackpot win, but if they do not match, then the jackpot random number will be "0" shown in the jackpot determination table. ” to “19999” is determined. If the jackpot random number value matches any one of "0" to "19999", the result of the jackpot determination is determined to be a small win, but if they do not match, the result of the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss. In this embodiment, in this case, the losing A symbol is displayed on the display devices 8 as the stop display mode of the second special symbol.

The probability of winning a jackpot (probability of winning a jackpot) in this embodiment is about 0.31% (1/318), which is the same for both the first special drawing and the second special drawing. Furthermore, the probability of a small hit (small win probability) is 0.0% for the first special drawing and approximately 30.5% (1/3.3) for the second special drawing.

If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot win or a small win, then the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) is determined by referring to the "win type random number" and the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 62(B). will be held. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special drawing is a jackpot win, the winning type random number value matches any of "0" to "94" shown in the winning type determination table (Figure 62 (B)). It is determined whether or not. If the winning type random number value matches any one of "0" to "94", it is determined to be the first jackpot symbol, but if it does not match, it is determined to be the second jackpot symbol. In this embodiment, when the winning type random value matches any of "0" to "94", the first jackpot symbol is displayed on the display 8 as the first special symbol stop display mode, and the winning type is If the random number value does not match any of "0" to "94", the second jackpot symbol is displayed on the display devices 8 as a stop display mode of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination for the second special drawing is a jackpot win, does the hit type random number match any of "0" to "19" shown in the win type determination table (Figure 62 (B))? It is determined whether or not. If the winning type random number value matches any one of "0" to "19", it is determined as a third jackpot symbol, but if it does not match, it is determined as a second jackpot symbol. In this embodiment, when the winning type random value matches any of "0" to "19", the third jackpot symbol is displayed on the display 8 as a stop display mode of the second special symbol, and the winning type is If the random number value does not match any of "0" to "19", a second jackpot symbol is displayed on the display devices 8 as a stop display mode of the second special symbol.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination for the second special drawing is a small hit, whether or not the hit type random number matches any of "0" to "19" shown in the hit type determination table (Figure 62 (B)). It is determined whether When the winning type random number value matches any one of "0" to "19", it is determined as the first small winning symbol, but when it does not match, it is determined as the second small winning symbol. In this embodiment, when the winning type random value matches any of "0" to "19", the first small winning symbol is displayed on the display 8 as a stop display mode of the second special symbol, and the winning If the type random number value does not match any of "0" to "19", the second small winning symbol is displayed on the display devices 8 as a stop display mode of the second special symbol.

12-3. Variation Pattern Next, of the configuration of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the third embodiment, the variation pattern that can be determined by the game control microcomputer 101 will be further explained based on FIG. 63. This game storage unit 101c stores a variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63.

First, a variation pattern that can be selected in conjunction with the jackpot determination of the first special figure when the gaming state is a non-time saving state (low base gaming state) will be explained. There are two types of variation patterns, "THP001" and "THP002", when the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is "jackpot winning" in the non-time saving state.

The variation pattern "THP001" is a variation pattern in which, after normal variation, SPSP reach is performed in a successful manner through reach, N reach, and SP reach. This fluctuation pattern "THP001" is also referred to as "SPSP jackpot fluctuation".

The variation pattern "THP002" is a variation pattern in which, after normal variation, SP reach is performed in a successful manner through reach and N reach. This fluctuation pattern "THP002" is also referred to as "SP jackpot fluctuation".

Next, in the non-time-saving state, when the result of the jackpot judgment of the first special symbol is "loss", the variation patterns "THP011", "THP012", "THP013", "THP021" and "THP022" are included. There are 5 types. Variation patterns "THP011", "THP012", and "THP013" are selected when the jackpot determination result of the first special symbol is "lose" and the reach determination result is "reach" in the non-time saving state. In contrast to the fluctuating patterns, the fluctuating patterns "THP021" and "THP022" are when the jackpot determination result of the first special symbol is "lose" and the reach determination result is "no reach" in the non-time saving state. This is the variation pattern selected.

The variation pattern "THP011" is a variation pattern in which after a normal variation, a reach, an N reach, and a SP reach are performed, and then an SPSP reach is performed in a failed manner. In other words, this is a variation pattern corresponding to the loss of the above-mentioned variation pattern "THP001". This fluctuation pattern "THP011" is also referred to as "SPSP loss fluctuation".

The variation pattern "THP012" is a variation pattern in which after a normal variation, a reach and an N reach are performed, and then an SP reach is performed in a failed manner. In other words, this is a variation pattern corresponding to the loss of the above-mentioned variation pattern "THP002". This fluctuation pattern "THP012" is also referred to as "SP loss fluctuation".

The variation pattern "THP013" is a variation pattern in which, after a normal variation, a reach is performed and then an N reach is performed in a failed manner. This fluctuation pattern "THP013" is also referred to as "N loss fluctuation".

Next, a variation pattern that can be selected in conjunction with the jackpot determination of the second special symbol when the gaming state is a non-time saving state (low base gaming state) will be explained. In addition, the jackpot determination of the second special figure when the gaming state is in the non-time saving state is the jackpot determination in which the reserved amount of the second special figure accumulated in the previous high base gaming state is executed in the low base gaming state. be. In the non-time-saving state, when the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is "jackpot winning", there is only one variation pattern, "THP031". Therefore, in the non-time saving state, if the result of the jackpot determination of the second special drawing is "jackpot winning", the remaining number of reservations of the second special drawing (remaining number of reservations of the second special drawing when selecting the fluctuation pattern) Regardless, this variation pattern "THP031" is selected.

The variation pattern "THP031" is a variation pattern in which a special reach (described later) is performed in a successful manner after a normal variation, followed by a reach. This fluctuation pattern “THP031” is also referred to as “non-time saving jackpot fluctuation”.

Further, in the non-time saving state, when the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a "small hit", there is only one variation pattern, "THP041". Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, if the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is "small win", this variation pattern "THP041" is selected regardless of the remaining number of second special symbols. The variation pattern "THP041", like the above variation pattern "THP031", is a variation pattern in which, after a normal variation, a reach is performed and then a special reach (described later) is performed in a successful manner. This fluctuation pattern "THP041" is also referred to as "non-time saving small winning fluctuation".

In the non-time-saving state, there is only one type of variation pattern when the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is "lose", which is the variation pattern "THP051". Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, if the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is "lose", this variation pattern "THP051" is selected regardless of the remaining number of reserved second special symbols. The variation pattern "THP051" is a variation pattern in which a special reach (described later) is performed in a failed manner after a normal variation, followed by a reach. This fluctuation pattern "THP051" is also referred to as "non-time saving loss fluctuation".

Next, a variation pattern that can be selected in accordance with the jackpot determination of the second special symbol when the gaming state is in the time saving state (high base gaming state) will be explained. In this embodiment, in the time-saving state being set, the remaining number of jackpot determinations for the second special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining time-saving number") is 1 time and when it is 2 or more times, selectable variations are available. The patterns are different.

When the remaining time saving number is 1 and the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is "jackpot winning" in the time saving state, there is only one variation pattern, "THP061". Therefore, if the remaining number of time savings is 1 and the result of the jackpot determination of the second special drawing is "jackpot winning" in the time saving state, this fluctuation pattern "THP062" will be applied regardless of the remaining number of reservations of the second special drawing. is selected. The variation pattern "THP061" is a variation pattern in which a special reach is performed in a successful manner through a right-handed hitting promotion effect (described later), a normal variation, and a reach. This fluctuation pattern “THP061” is also referred to as “first time-saving jackpot fluctuation”.

There is only one variation pattern, "THP071", when the remaining time saving number is 1 and the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is "small hit" in the time saving state. Therefore, if the remaining time saving number is 1 and the result of the jackpot judgment of the second special drawing is "small hit" in the time saving state, this fluctuation pattern "THP071" will be applied regardless of the remaining number of reservations of the second special drawing. is selected. The variation pattern "THP071" is a variation pattern in which a special reach is performed in a successful manner through a right-handed hitting promotion effect (described later), a normal variation, and a reach. This fluctuation pattern "THP071" is also referred to as "first time saving small winning fluctuation".

There is only one variation pattern "THP081" when the remaining time saving number is 1 and the result of jackpot determination of the second special symbol is "loss" in the time saving state. Therefore, if the remaining time saving number is 1 and the result of the jackpot judgment of the 2nd special drawing is "loss" in the time saving state, this fluctuation pattern "THP081" is selected. The variation pattern "THP081" is a variation pattern that does not depend on the remaining number of second special symbols, and is a variation pattern in which a special reach is performed in a failed manner through a right hit promotion effect (described later), a normal variation, and a reach. This fluctuation pattern "THP081" is also referred to as "first time saving loss fluctuation".

When the remaining time saving number is 2 or more and the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is "jackpot winning" in the time saving state, there is only one variation pattern, "THP062". Therefore, if the remaining time saving number is 2 or more and the result of the jackpot determination of the second special drawing is "Jackpot winning" in the time saving state, this fluctuation pattern "THP062 ” is selected. The fluctuation pattern "THP062" is a pattern in which a normal fluctuation is followed by a reach, and then a successful SPSP reach. This fluctuation pattern “THP062” is also referred to as “second time-saving jackpot fluctuation”.

When the remaining time saving number is 2 or more and the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is "small hit" in the time saving state, there is only one variation pattern, "THP072". Therefore, if the remaining time saving number is 2 or more and the result of the jackpot determination of the second special drawing is "small hit" in the time saving state, this fluctuation pattern "THP072 ” is selected. The fluctuation pattern "THP072" is a pattern in which a normal fluctuation is followed by a reach, and then a successful SPSP reach. This fluctuation pattern "THP072" is also referred to as "second time saving small winning fluctuation".

If the remaining time saving number is 2 or more, and in the time saving state, the result of the jackpot judgment of the second special drawing is "Lose" and the result of reach judgment is "Reach", there is only one variation pattern, "THP082". It is. Therefore, if the remaining time saving number is 2 or more, and in the time saving state, the jackpot judgment result of the 2nd special drawing is "Lose" and the reach judgment result is "Reach", the remaining number of reservations of the 2nd special drawing This variation pattern "THP082" is selected regardless of the change. This fluctuation pattern "THP082" is a pattern in which, after a normal fluctuation, a reach is performed and then an SPSP reach is performed in a failed manner. This fluctuation pattern "THP082" is also referred to as "second time saving loss fluctuation".

When the remaining time saving number is 2 or more, and the result of the jackpot judgment of the second special drawing is "Lose" and the result of reach judgment is "No reach" in the time saving state, the variation pattern is "THP083" and There are two types: "THP084". Fluctuation pattern "THP083" means that the number of remaining time savings is 2 or more, the result of the jackpot judgment of the second special drawing is "lose" in the time saving state, the result of reach judgment is "no reach", and the remaining time of the second special drawing is "lost". This is a variation pattern that is selected when the number of reservations is "0", whereas the variation pattern "THP084" is a variation pattern that is selected when the number of remaining time savings is 2 or more and the result of the jackpot judgment of the second special drawing is in the time savings state. This is a variation pattern that is selected when the result of the reach judgment is "No reach", and the remaining number of reserved second special symbols is "1", "2", "3", or "4". .

The fluctuation pattern "THP083" is a fluctuation pattern in which normal fluctuation is performed with a variable display time of 10000 ms. Further, the variation pattern "THP084" is a variation pattern in which normal variation is performed in a variable display time of 1500 ms, which is shorter than the above-mentioned variation pattern "THP083". These fluctuation patterns "THP083" and "THP084" are also referred to as "third time saving loss fluctuation".

12-4. Performance Next, various performances in the third embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 64 to 67. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the present embodiment can execute a "special reach" and a "right hit promotion performance" in the special symbol variation performance. Also, during the execution of the small winning game, it is possible to execute the "passable notification effect" as in the first embodiment. The special reach is a production that can suggest that there is a possibility of a jackpot (that is, a fluctuating special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol and stops). Further, the right-handed hitting promotion performance is a performance for encouraging the player to play right-handed. Further, the passing notification performance is a performance for notifying that the second big prize opening 15 is opened in the small winning game and that the game ball can pass through the specific area 16.

12-4-1. Special Reach First, the special reach of the third embodiment will be further explained using FIGS. 64 and 65. The special reach of this embodiment is a performance that can be executed as part of a special symbol variation performance. This special reach is an image performance in which a medium performance pattern EZ2 of the same type as the left performance pattern EZ1 and right performance pattern EZ3 forming the reach, or a medium performance pattern EZ2 including the number one before them, stops.

A special reach after the reach in which the "5" symbol is temporarily stopped will be explained as an example of the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3. Specifically, after the normal variation of the special figure variation effect shown in FIG. 64(A), the reach shown in FIG. 64(B) is continued, and then the execution of the special reach is started.

During execution of the special reach, the medium effect pattern EZ2 moves (scrolls) from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a. Then, the "4" symbol, which includes a number 1 smaller than the number of the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, forming a reach, is displayed in the center of the display section 50a (specifically, the "4" symbol includes the number 1 smaller than the number of the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3). Before reaching the interval), the moving speed of the medium effect pattern EZ2 decreases. Then, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a "4" symbol and a "5" symbol move to the center of the display section 50a in this order.

As shown in FIG. 65 (B-1), if the "5" symbol temporarily stops as the middle effect pattern EZ2 between the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3, then the left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect Both the symbol EZ2 and the right performance symbol EZ3 stop at the "5" symbol. Then, when these left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are fully stopped, the three small symbols KZ1, Z2, and Z3 also stop as shown in FIG. 65 (C-1). will be displayed. This makes it possible to inform the player that the result of the current jackpot determination is a jackpot win or a small win. In this way, the performance pattern EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 stops in a manner that suggests a jackpot win, and the performance pattern (performance content) is such that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot win, or the performance pattern EZ1, EZ2 , the performance mode (performance content) in which the EZ3 stops in a manner that suggests a small hit and notifies that the result of the jackpot determination is a small win is also referred to as a "success mode." Moreover, the special reach in these production modes is also particularly referred to as the "special reach in the successful mode." In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation mode for notifying that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot win and the presentation mode for notifying that the result of the jackpot determination is a small win are the same.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (B-2), if the "4" symbol temporarily stops between the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, then as shown in FIG. 65 (C-2), The left performance symbol EZ1, the middle performance symbol EZ2, and the right performance symbol EZ3 come to a main stop. Then, like the special reach in the above-mentioned success mode, during the main stop of the left effect pattern EZ1, middle effect pattern EZ2, and right effect pattern EZ3, the three small patterns KZ1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed, and the special Reach execution ends. The performance mode (performance content) in which the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped in a manner that suggests a miss in the reach is also referred to as a "failure mode." Moreover, the special reach in this production mode is also particularly referred to as "special reach in failure mode."

As a result of the above, due to the execution of the special reach, the "4" symbol stops between the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 during the execution of the special reach, and the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are failure conditions that suggest a reach loss. Or will the "5" symbol stop between the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 will become a success pattern that suggests a jackpot win (or small win)? This makes it possible to draw the attention of players.

12-4-2. Right-handed hitting promotion performance Next, the right-handed hitting promotion performance of the third embodiment will be described using FIG. 66. This right-handed hitting promotion performance is, as described above, a performance for encouraging the player to play right-handed. The right hitting promotion performance of this embodiment is a performance that can be executed as a part of the special symbol fluctuation performance, similar to the above-mentioned special reach. In this embodiment, this is performed at the same time as the start of execution of the special figure display performance when the remaining number of jackpot determinations (remaining number of time savers) for the second special figure is one in the time saving state being set.

Specifically, if the execution of the right-handed driving promotion effect is started at the same time as the execution of the special figure display effect when the remaining time saving number is 1, the character string "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 66 is included inside. , a right-hand hitting image G203 in the shape of an arrow pointing to the right is displayed at the center of the display section 50a. As shown in FIG. 2, the gate 13 is installed on the right side of the gaming area 6, and the opening/closing member 12k of the second starting port 12 can be opened from the center of the gaming area 6 toward the right side. Therefore, by executing the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the player can launch the game ball toward the right side game area 6, and it is possible to cause more game balls to enter the second starting port 12. There is.

12-4-3. Passable Notification Performance The passable notification performance is a performance for notifying that the second grand prize opening 15 is open and that the game ball can pass through the specific area 16, as in the first embodiment. By executing this passing notification effect, the player can be made aware that the game ball can pass through the specific area 16 within the second grand prize opening 15.

Unlike the first embodiment, there are two types of display modes (normal mode and special mode) in the passable notification effect of the third embodiment. The normal mode is the display mode shown in the first embodiment. Specifically, a character display image G120 shown in FIG. 19(A) and a first line image G121 uttered by the character shown in the character display image G120 indicating the character string "Let the ball pass through the specific area!" are displayed. This is the display mode. On the other hand, the special mode is a character display image G120 shown in FIG. 67, and a fourth line image G151 showing the character string "Make sure to pass the ball through a specific area!" uttered by the character shown in the character display image G120. This is a display mode that displays.

The fourth dialogue image G151 in the special mode includes the character string "must" which is not present in the first dialogue image G121. Therefore, when a passing notification effect is performed in a special manner that displays such a fourth dialogue image G151, the player who sees the fourth dialogue image G151 is made conscious of passing the game ball to the specific area 16. It is now possible to do so.

Moreover, among the character strings of the fourth dialogue image G151, "must" is a bolder character than the other characters. Therefore, when the passability notification effect is executed in a special mode of displaying the fourth dialogue image G151, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the character string "must" in the fourth dialogue image G151, It is possible to make the player who sees the fourth dialogue image G151 more reliably aware of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 16.

The passable notification performance of the third embodiment is started at the same time as the start of the 1R-th small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game). The performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether to execute the passable notification performance in the normal mode or in the special mode, depending on the small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game) that will be played from now on. Determined by referring to the difference in the number of balls at the start of execution.

Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information in the difference ball number storage unit 107c of the main control board 100 at the timing when the execution of the small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game) to be played from now on starts. It is determined whether the stored number of difference balls (information on the number of difference balls) is greater than or equal to 79985 (15 less than the reference number). When the difference number of balls is 79985 or more, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference number of balls becomes equal to or more than the reference number during the execution of the 1st round of the small winning game. On the other hand, if the difference number of balls has not reached 79985, it is determined that the difference number of balls does not reach the reference number during the execution of the 1st round of the small winning game.

If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of difference balls does not reach the reference number during the 1st round execution of the small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game) that will be played from now on, the production control microcomputer 121 At the same time as the small winning game starts, execution of the passing possibility notification effect is started on the display unit 50a in the normal mode (see FIG. 19(A)). In addition, during execution of the small winning game, if the game ball passes through the specific area 16 of the second big prize opening 15, from the execution of the passing possibility notification effect in the normal mode, to the same as in the first embodiment. The process switches to execution of the 1 notification effect (see FIG. 19 (B-1)). Specifically, when the specific area sensor 16a detects passage of the game ball to the specific area 16, the performance control microcomputer 121 ends the execution of the passable notification performance in the normal mode and executes the first notification performance. Start. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 during the execution of the small winning game, from the execution of the passable notification effect in the normal mode, to the execution of the second notification effect similar to the first embodiment. (See FIG. 19 (B-2)). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 closes the second big prize opening 15 that was opened with the execution of the small winning game, ends the execution of the passable notification performance in the normal mode, and starts the second notification performance. Start execution.

On the other hand, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the difference in the number of balls will be equal to or greater than the reference number during the execution of the small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game) that will be played from now on, the production control microcomputer 121 At the same time as the winning game starts, execution of the passing possibility notification effect is started in a special manner (see FIG. 67). In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 during the execution of the small winning game, the execution of the passable notification effect in the special mode is switched to the execution of the first notification effect (FIG. 19 (B-1) reference)). On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 during the execution of the small winning game, the execution of the passable notification effect in the special mode is switched to the execution of the second notification effect (Fig. 19 (B-2) )reference).

During the 1st round of the small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game), it is possible for a game ball to win in the specific area 16 of the second large winning opening 15 and the difference in the number of balls to be equal to or greater than the standard number. If the game ball does not win in the specific area 16 of the second big prize opening 15 when there is a chance, the small winning game ends without executing the 2nd and subsequent round games. Then, in the game immediately after that, the difference in the number of balls becomes more than the standard number by winning in the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, or general winning hole 10, and after that, the rush ends without any jackpot games or small winning games. As a result, the game may be controlled so that it cannot be executed. In such a case, a player who does not place a game ball in the specific area 16 during the small winning game will be disadvantaged.

Therefore, if the difference in the number of balls becomes more than the standard number during the 1st round of the small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game) to be played from now on, the normal mode is not used, but the normal mode is Passage possibility notification performance is performed in a special manner that is conspicuous and can make the player aware of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 16. As a result, during the execution of the 1st round of the small winning game, it is possible to have the player pass the game ball through the specific area 16 of the second big prize opening 15, and the player is not subject to the above-mentioned disadvantages. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Moreover, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the third embodiment, the game is controlled to be unplayable due to the end of the rush after the number of difference balls exceeds the reference number, so the number of difference balls is If the game ball can pass through the specific area 16 in the 1st round of the small winning game in which is equal to or greater than the reference number, the player can win the prize ball in at least the 2nd round and subsequent round games. That is, if the game ball is able to pass through the specific area 16 during the execution of the 1st round of the small winning game, prize balls exceeding the standard number can be given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to offset the regret that the player feels when the game is subsequently controlled to be impossible to execute.

12-5. Effects of the Third Embodiment As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the third embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the reference number (80,000), the game is executed at the end of the subsequent rush. It becomes impossible. Therefore, if the difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or greater than the standard number in response to winning in the second large prize opening 15 in the 1st round of the small winning game, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 16, the 2nd round of the small winning game In addition to the subsequent round games not being executed, the game is executed when the difference in the number of balls exceeds the standard number due to the winning of each ball entry hole other than the specific area 16 immediately after the end of the 1st round game of the small winning game. There is a risk that it may become uncontrollable.

Therefore, if the difference in the number of balls becomes more than the standard number due to the prize balls awarded in response to winning in the second grand prize opening 15 in the 1st round of the small winning game, special A passing notification effect is performed in this manner. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 16 by the passing notification effect. Therefore, the player can more reliably enter the game ball into the second large winning hole 15, and can make the difference in the number of balls more than the reference number in the 1st round of the small winning game.

In addition, if the difference in the number of balls in a small winning game is equal to or greater than the standard number, the timing at which the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state after the execution of the small winning game (the end of the rush shown in FIG. 26(C)) The game will stop at the timing of Therefore, even after the difference in the number of balls exceeds the reference number in the 1st round of the small winning game, it is possible for the player to enjoy at least the 2nd and subsequent round games of the small winning game.

13. Example of change Below, an example of change will be explained. In addition, in the description of the modification example, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the above embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. Further, the technical features in the above embodiments and the modified examples described below can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

In the third embodiment, the passable notification effect is the "notification effect" according to the present invention. However, the notification performance may be a performance with different performance content from the passability notification performance. Specifically, for example, the effect may be created using an image different from the character display image G120 shown in FIG. 19(A). Further, for example, an effect may be performed using an image in which the first dialogue image G121 shown in FIG. 19(A) has a different character string. Further, for example, in addition to the character display image G120 and the first dialogue image G121 shown in FIG. 19(A), other images may be used for the effect. Furthermore, for example, the effect may be performed using only the first dialogue image G121 without using the character display image G120 shown in FIG. 19(A). Further, for example, an effect using an image different from the character display image G120 shown in FIG. 67 may be used. Furthermore, for example, an image may be used as an effect using a fourth dialogue image G151 shown in FIG. 67 having a different character string. Further, for example, in addition to the character display image G120 and the fourth dialogue image G151 shown in FIG. 67, other images may be used for the effect. Further, for example, the effect may be performed using only the fourth dialogue image G151 without using the character display image G120 shown in FIG. 67.

Further, in the third embodiment, the special aspect of the passability notification effect shown in FIG. 67 is defined as the "conspicuous aspect" according to the present invention. However, any presentation mode other than the special mode of the passable notification presentation shown in FIG. 67 may be used as long as it is more conspicuous than the normal mode of the passable notification presentation. Specifically, for example, instead of the bold text of the character string of the fourth dialogue image G151 shown in FIG. 67, a different color may be used. Furthermore, for example, instead of bold fonts, a different font may be used. Furthermore, for example, instead of bold letters, it may be possible to use characters with so-called "bordering". Furthermore, for example, instead of bold letters, a display mode may be used in which letters are larger than others.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the image effect is the "notification effect" according to the present invention. However, for example, a sound effect using a speaker may be used as the notification effect. In this case, for example, there may be a configuration in which a presentation mode with a louder volume than the normal mode is set as a special mode. Further, for example, a light emission effect using a lamp may be used as the notification effect. In this case, for example, there may be a configuration in which a special mode is a display mode with higher brightness than the normal mode, a structure in which a special mode is a display mode with a luminescent color brighter than the normal mode, or a display mode with a darker luminescence than the normal mode. Examples include a configuration in which the mode is a special mode, and a configuration in which the blinking mode is a special mode in contrast to the normal mode, which is a lighting mode. Further, for example, a movable body performance using a movable body may be used as the notification performance. In this case, for example, there may be a configuration in which a performance mode with a larger range of motion than the normal mode is a special mode, or a configuration in which a performance mode that involves faster movement than the normal mode is set as a special mode.

Further, in the third embodiment, the timing of starting execution of the passing notification performance (notification performance) is set as the timing of starting execution of the small winning game (first special game). However, the timing for starting the execution of the notification effect may be the timing after the start of the execution of the first special game. Specifically, for example, after the execution of the first special game, the timing when a game ball enters (wins) the opened second big prize hole 15 (in detail, the game ball passes through the second big prize hole sensor 15a) timing). Also, for example, after the execution of the first special game, the timing when the game ball that entered the opened second big prize opening 15 enters the specific area 16 (wins) (in detail, the game ball passes the specific area sensor 16a timing). Further, the timing for starting the execution of the notification effect may be set to be the timing before the execution of the first special game is started. In other words, the timing may be during special symbol fluctuation immediately before the first special game is executed.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the passability notification effect (information effect) is executed, the execution of the notification effect is started in a special mode or a normal mode. However, when the notification effect is executed in a special mode, the execution of the notification effect is first started in the normal mode as shown in FIG. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the presentation mode of the is switched. The predetermined timing may be, for example, the timing at which the execution of the small winning game (first special game) starts, or the timing after the execution of the first special game (specifically, the second major prize that has been opened). The timing when the game ball enters the opening 15 (wins) (more specifically, the timing when the game ball passes the second grand prize opening sensor 15a (FIG. 68(B))), or when the second grand prize opening 15 is opened. The timing when the game ball enters the specific area 16 (wins a prize) (in detail, the timing when the game ball passes the specific area sensor 16a (FIG. 68(B)), etc.), and the execution of the first special game. For example, the timing before the start of the process.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the passability notification effect (information effect) is executed, the execution of the notification effect is started in a special mode or a normal mode. However, when the notification effect is executed in a special mode, the execution of the notification effect is first started in the normal mode as shown in FIG. It is also possible to have an additional configuration. The predetermined timing may be, for example, the timing at which the execution of the small winning game (first special game) starts, or the timing after the execution of the first special game (specifically, the second major prize that has been opened). The timing when the game ball enters the opening 15 (wins) (more specifically, the timing when the game ball passes the second grand prize opening sensor 15a (FIG. 68(B))), or when the second grand prize opening 15 is opened. The timing when the game ball enters the specific area 16 (wins a prize) (in detail, the timing when the game ball passes the specific area sensor 16a (FIG. 68(B)), etc.), and the execution of the first special game. For example, the timing before the start of the process.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the passable notification performance (notification performance) is executed in the special mode, if the game ball passes through the specific area 16 during execution of the notification performance, the notification performance in the normal mode is executed. As in the case of execution, the execution is configured to switch to the first notification effect (passage notification effect) shown in FIG. 19(B-1). However, if the game ball passes through the specific area 16 when the notification effect is executed in the normal mode, the passage notification effect shown in FIG. 19 (B-1) is executed, and when the notification effect is executed in the special mode, the game ball When the ball passes through the specific area 16, a configuration may be adopted in which a passage notification performance that is different in presentation form from the passage notification performance shown in FIG. 19 (B-1) can be executed. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the passing notification effect is sometimes performed in a special mode different from the normal mode as the passing notification effect after the execution of the notification effect in the special mode. As a passage notification performance in such a special manner, for example, the character display image G120 shown in FIG. 69 and the fifth line indicating the character string "Congratulations on passing!!" uttered by the character shown in the character display image G120. An example of this is image rendering that displays the image G161 on the display section 50a. This passing notification effect includes the character string "really" which is not present in the passing notification effect shown in FIG. It is possible.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) becomes equal to or greater than the reference number in the 1st round (first special game) of the small winning game, the round game (the first special game) after the 2nd round of the small winning game After the execution of the special game (2), the game is stopped at the timing when the game state is set to the normal game state (the timing at which the rush ends as shown in FIG. 26(C)). However, if the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the standard number due to the prize balls awarded in response to winning in the second major winning hole 15 (variable winning area) in the first special game, the first special The game may be controlled to be unplayable after the execution of the second special game following the execution of the game. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game is controlled to be impossible to execute immediately after the execution of the second special game. Furthermore, for example, after the execution of the second special game, the game may be controlled to be unexecutable before the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state.

Further, in the first embodiment, the second large winning hole 15 is the "variable winning area" according to the present invention. However, instead of the second big winning hole 15, the first big winning hole 14 may be made into a variable winning area.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are referred to as the "first gaming state" and the "second gaming state" according to the present invention. However, if the first gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, the first gaming state is set to a gaming state other than the high-probability, high-base gaming state, and the second gaming state is set to a low-probability, high-probability gaming state. A game state other than the base game state may be used.

Further, the first gaming state is set as a gaming state in which it is more likely to be determined that a jackpot game will be executed than the second gaming state. In other words, the first game state is a game state in which the special symbol is more likely to be stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (special mode) than the second game state. However, both the first game state and the second game state may be game states in which special symbols can be stopped and displayed in a special manner to the same extent. Further, the first game state may be a game state in which it is more difficult for the special symbols to be stopped and displayed in a special manner than in the second game state.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, the jackpot game is defined as a "special game" according to the present invention. However, instead of the jackpot game, a small win game may be used as a special game.

Further, in the first, second, and third embodiments, the reference number is 80,000, but it may be a number other than 80,000, such as 200,000, 120,000, 100,000, 85,000, 60,000, or 50,000.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first notification effect shown in FIG. 19 (B-1) is the "approach notification effect" according to the present invention. However, a presentation with different presentation content from that shown in FIG. 19 (B-1) may be used as the entry notification presentation. Specifically, for example, a performance including a dialogue image indicating a character string other than the second dialogue image G122 may be used as an entry notification performance. Furthermore, for example, a presentation in which the character display image G120 is not displayed may be used as an entry notification presentation. Furthermore, for example, a presentation in which the second dialogue image G122 is not displayed may be used as an entry notification presentation.

Further, in the first embodiment, the image effect shown in FIG. 19 (B-2) is used as the second notification effect. However, a presentation with different presentation content from that shown in FIG. 19 (B-2) may be used as the second notification presentation. Specifically, for example, a performance including a dialogue image indicating a character string other than the third dialogue image G123 may be set as the second notification performance. Furthermore, for example, a presentation in which the character display image G120 is not displayed may be used as the second notification presentation. Furthermore, for example, a performance in which the third dialogue image G123 is not displayed may be used as the second notification performance.

In addition, in the first embodiment, if the game ball enters the specific area 16 during the execution of the jackpot game The configuration is such that a second notification performance is executed in place of the first notification performance (approach notification performance). However, in such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which neither the first notification effect (approach notification effect) nor the second notification effect is executed. Further, in such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which there are times when the second notification performance is performed instead of the first notification performance (approach notification performance) and times when the second notification performance is not performed either.

Further, in such a case, instead of the first notification performance (enter notification performance), a configuration may be adopted in which a performance is performed to notify that the game will be controlled to be impossible to execute thereafter.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot game to be played from now on is the jackpot game It is configured to determine whether the number of difference balls (information on the number of difference balls) stored in 107c is 79250 (750 less than the reference number) or more. However, the performance control microcomputer 121 may be configured to determine whether the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the main control board 100 is 79250 or more at the timing before the start of the execution of the jackpot game X. good. Alternatively, the performance control microcomputer 121 may be configured to determine whether the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the main control board 100 is 79250 or more at the timing after the start of the execution of the jackpot game X. good.

In addition, when the jackpot game to be played from now on is jackpot game Z, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores the difference ball number storage unit 107c of the main control board 100 at the timing when the execution of this jackpot game Z starts. The configuration is such that it is determined whether the difference number of balls (information on the number of difference balls) is 78500 or more (a number 1500 less than the reference number). However, the performance control microcomputer 121 may be configured to determine whether the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the main control board 100 is 78500 or more at the timing before the start of the execution of the jackpot game Z. good. Alternatively, the performance control microcomputer 121 may be configured to determine whether the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c of the main control board 100 is 78500 or more at the timing after the start of the execution of the jackpot game Z. good.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot game to be played from now on is jackpot game X (or jackpot game Z), the performance control microcomputer 121 is configured to be determined based on the number of difference balls (information on the number of difference balls) stored in the difference number of balls storage section 107c of the main control board 100. However, if the production control board 120 includes a difference ball number storage unit and the jackpot game to be played from now on is jackpot game X (or jackpot game Z), at the timing when the execution of jackpot game X (or jackpot game Z) starts , it may be configured such that the performance control microcomputer 121 makes the determination based on the number of difference balls (information on the number of difference balls) stored in the difference ball number storage section of the performance control board 120.

Further, in the first embodiment, the timing of starting execution of the passability notification effect is the timing of starting 10R (10th round game) of the jackpot game. However, the timing may be set after the start of 10R of the jackpot game. Alternatively, the timing may be set before the start of 10R of the jackpot game.

Further, in the first embodiment, the round game in which the game ball can pass to the specific area 16 is set to 10R (10th round game). However, a round game other than 10R may be used.

In addition, in the second embodiment, there are two types of first special games (Jackpot Game 1, Jackpot Game 3) in which the game state after execution is set to a high probability high base game state (first game state). And so. However, only one type of first special game, or three or more types of first special games may be provided.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the second special game is set to a low probability high base game state (second game state) after execution, and is provided with two types (jackpot game 2, jackpot game 4). And so. However, a configuration may be adopted in which only one type of second special game or three or more types of second special games are provided.

Further, in the second embodiment, the special figure variation performance in which the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at odd numbered zeros (three in a row) is referred to as the "first advance notification performance" according to the present invention. In other words, the first advance notification performance is a special figure variation performance in which the type of image included in the performance pattern is stopped and displayed as a number (odd number). However, the first advance notification performance may be a special symbol variation performance in which the types of images included in the performance pattern are stopped and displayed in the same color (such as red). In addition, the special pattern variation performance in which the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at even numbered zeros (three in a row) was defined as the "second advance notification performance" according to the present invention. In other words, the special symbol variation performance in which the type of image included in the performance pattern is stopped and displayed as a number (even number) is set as the second advance notification performance. However, the second advance notification performance may be a special symbol variation performance in which the type of image included in the performance pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific color (such as blue) different from that of the first advance notification performance in the same color.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot game 1 or the jackpot game 3 (first special game) in which the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) does not reach the reference number is performed, an odd number of doubles is used as the production symbol. The structure is such that a special figure variation effect (first advance notification effect) in which the icon is stopped and displayed is sometimes performed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the first advance notification effect is always performed in such a case. Further, when the first special game in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is played, the second advance notification performance is performed. However, in such cases, when the second advance notice performance is performed, and when the second advance notice performance is not performed, a special game other than the first advance notice performance or the second advance notice performance is simply performed. It may also be configured such that there are times when an effect is performed to notify the user of the event.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot game 1 or the jackpot game 3 (first special game) in which the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number is performed, the performance content of the special figure fluctuation performance once determined by lottery The configuration is such that a second advance notification effect is performed by replacing the . However, when the first special game in which the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number is played, the special figure variation pattern can be determined by lottery from the special figure variation patterns that do not have the first advance notice effect and only have the second advance notice effect. It may also be a configuration. In other words, instead of replacing the production content of the special pattern variation effect after drawing the special pattern variation pattern, from the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. The table may be changed to a table having only figure variation patterns, and the special figure variation pattern may be determined by lottery.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, odd-numbered squares (a set of three) are defined as the "first display mode" according to the present invention. However, among the colors in the image included in the effect design, the first display mode may be a specific color (red, etc.). Further, even numbered squares (a set of three) were defined as the "second display mode" according to the present invention. However, among the colors in the images included in the effect design, the second display mode may be a specific color (such as blue) that is different from the first display mode.

Further, in the second embodiment, the symbol change effects shown in FIGS. 59(D), (E), and (F-1) are referred to as "aspect change effects" according to the present invention. However, a presentation with different presentation contents from those shown in FIGS. 59(D), (E), and (F-1) may be used as a mode-changing presentation. Specifically, for example, the effect without blackout shown in FIG. 59(E) may be used as the mode change effect.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot game 1 or the jackpot game 3 (first special game) in which the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) does not reach the reference number, an even numbered zero (second After the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in (display mode), before the execution of the first special game, and before the execution of the special symbol fluctuation performance (second advance notification performance) in which the performance symbols are stopped and displayed on an even number of zeros. , the structure is such that there are times when a pattern change performance (aspect change performance) is performed and times when a pattern change performance is not performed. However, in that case, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode change effect is always performed.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the promotion effect shown in FIG. 60 is defined as a "special effect" according to the present invention. However, a performance with different performance content from that shown in FIG. 60 may be used as a special performance. Specifically, for example, a performance without blackout may be used as a special performance.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the promotion performance (special performance) can be executed once during the execution of one jackpot game (special game). However, the special performance may be configured to be able to be executed multiple times during execution of one special game.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the promotion performance (special performance) is configured to be executable during the execution of the 1R round game of the jackpot game (special game). However, a configuration may be adopted in which the special performance can be executed during execution of a round game other than the 1st round of the special game. Further, it may be configured such that it can be executed during an opening, interval, or ending other than a round game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 121 refers to the difference number of balls at the start of the execution of the special figure fluctuation performance whose jackpot determination result is a jackpot win, and makes a difference during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game. It is configured to determine whether the number of balls is equal to or greater than a reference number. However, the performance control microcomputer 121 refers to the difference number of balls before the start of execution of the special figure fluctuation performance whose jackpot determination result is jackpot winning, and the difference number of balls is equal to or greater than the reference number during the execution of the subsequent jackpot game. It may be configured to determine whether or not. Alternatively, the performance control microcomputer 121 refers to the difference number of balls after the start of execution of the special figure fluctuation performance whose jackpot determination result is a jackpot win, and determines whether the difference number of balls is equal to or greater than the reference number during the subsequent execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

In addition, in the second embodiment, if the special symbol variation performance that is about to start execution indicates the jackpot winning of the jackpot symbol 1, the performance control microcomputer is activated at the timing when the execution of this special symbol variation production starts. 121 is configured to make a determination based on the number of difference balls (information on the number of difference balls) stored in the difference number of balls storage section 107c of the main control board 100. However, if the production control board 120 is equipped with a difference ball number storage unit and the special figure variation production that is about to start execution indicates a jackpot winning of jackpot symbol 1, the timing at which the execution of this special figure variation production starts is Alternatively, the performance control microcomputer 121 may determine based on the number of difference balls (information on the number of difference balls) stored in the difference ball number storage section of the performance control board 120.

Further, in the first embodiment, the round game in which the game ball can pass to the specific area 16 is set to 10R (10th round game). However, a round game other than 10R may be used.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the first predetermined number of times is 130 times, but it may be less than 130 times or more than 130 times. Furthermore, although the second predetermined number of times is 100 times, it may be less than 100 times or more than 100 times.

In addition, the gaming machines of the first and second embodiments described above are used as gaming machines that execute a small winning game in which the big prize opening opens for a maximum of 1.8 seconds when a small winning is won in a special symbol lottery. may be configured. In this case, it may be configured as a gaming machine in which a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed when a game ball that enters the jackpot due to execution of the small jackpot passes through a specific area in the jackpot. . Then, if you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed, and when the game ball passes through a specific area in the jackpot, a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed. It may be configured as a type 2 jackpot game.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments described above, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the transition is made from the high probability high base state (advantageous gaming state) to the normal gaming state (see FIG. 26), An over-prize ball prevention function is activated when transitioning from a guaranteed high base state (advantageous gaming state) to a normal gaming state. However, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated not only when the advantageous gaming state is transferred to the normal gaming state, but also when the advantageous gaming state ends. For example, when transitioning from a high-accuracy, high-base state (advantageous gaming state) to a low-accuracy, high-base state, or from a high-accuracy, high-base state to a high-accuracy, low-base state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. You can also do it.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70, when transitioning from the high probability high base state to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the maximum number of reserved special drawings 2 is 4 (predetermined number). It is assumed that the special drawing 2 drawing is executed with priority over the special drawing 1 drawing, and is set to be more advantageous to the player than the special drawing 1 drawing. In this case, when the state shifts from the high probability/high base state to the normal gaming state, the lottery of the special drawing 2 will be executed four times, and it can be said that the state is still advantageous for the player. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the game is in an advantageous gaming state until all of the remaining special drawing 2 reservations (special drawing 2 remaining reservations) are used up when the state shifts to the normal gaming state. Then, when all the remaining special symbols 2 are used up (when the variable display and stop display of the 2nd special symbol based on the remaining 2 special symbols are all finished), the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (game (see FIG. 70). In addition, the drawing for special drawing 1 may be executed with priority over the drawing for special drawing 2, or the drawing for special drawing 1 may be executed in priority order than the drawing for special drawing 2. A lottery or a special drawing 2 lottery may be executed.

In particular, if it is a 1st and 2nd type mixing machine and you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, the 2nd type jackpot game will virtually always be executed (the game ball can pass through a specific area). In this case, as shown in FIG. 70, it is preferable that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated when all the remaining special drawings 2 are used up in the normal gaming state. This is because even if the state shifts from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal game state, the type 2 jackpot game is very likely to be executed until all of the remaining reserved special symbols 2 are used up. That is, if the game becomes impossible to execute due to the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function at the timing when the high base state ends, the chance to win the type 2 jackpot game will be lost, which will be bad for the player. Note that the upper limit number of special drawings 2 reserved is not limited to four, but may be one, for example, and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, the timing at which the over-prize ball prevention function is activated is when the high-accuracy high-base state ends or when the low-accuracy high-base state ends. However, the over-winning ball prevention function may be activated only when the high-accuracy, high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (consecutive game period)" ends. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in number of balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or at the timing when the customer waiting state continues for a certain fixed period of time. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference number of balls is 80,000 or more and the jackpot game state ends. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments, the first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed (see FIG. 27(A)), or the customer waiting state is one hour. When the second reset condition (see FIG. 27(B)) of continuing (for a predetermined period of time) is satisfied, the difference number of balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated at the timing when the jackpot game state ends or when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, as shown in FIG. The difference in the number of balls may be reset when transitioning from the high probability base state (advantageous gaming state) to the normal gaming state. In this case, the difference in number of balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (consecutive play period)" ends, so only if the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 (standard number) during one rush state. , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-accuracy, high-base state and the low-accuracy, high-base state, the number of differential balls may be reset when transitioning from an advantageous gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state or a high-accuracy, low-base state to a normal gaming state. . Further, the number of differential balls may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour), the difference number of balls may be reset. In this case, if the normal gaming state continues for a specific period of time (for example, one hour), it means that the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the difference number of balls, it is possible to prevent the difference number of balls from exceeding 80,000 for a while. Note that the above-mentioned specific time is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. Further, for example, the difference in the number of balls may be reset by turning the power off and on (turning the power back on).

For example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9 am), the difference number of balls may be reset. In this case, it is possible to automatically eliminate the difference in the number of balls without forcing the employees of the gaming hall to perform any operations. Note that the reference time described above is not limited to 9:00 a.m., and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) for resetting the number of differential balls was arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 8). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference number of balls can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or on a dedicated board.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the measured number of differential balls was not displayed on the display means. However, the measured difference number of balls may be displayed on the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured number of difference balls on the display 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9). In this case, for example, when the number of differential balls is 0 to 50,000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and the number of differential balls is 50,001 to 70,000. (second range), the second mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and when the difference in the number of balls is between 70,001 and 80,000 (third range), the second mode is displayed. The third aspect may be displayed on the appliance 8 or 7 segment display 300. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of differential balls (or information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls) to the production control board 120, and the production control microcomputer 121 displays the image. The difference in the number of balls may be displayed on a display means such as the device 50. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of prize balls that have been paid out (or the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be paid out) and information on detection by the discharge port sensor to the production control board 120. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 may calculate the difference number of balls based on this information, and thereby display the difference number of balls on a display means such as the image display device 50.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the number of difference balls on the 7-segment display 300, as in a modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, the information on the difference number of balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections), and is stored in the four storage areas of the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107, respectively. . The first storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time. The second storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) until when the power was turned off last time. The third storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times ago) until when the power was turned off two times before. The 4th (N)th storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two previous times (three times ago) to when the power was turned off two previous times. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured difference in the number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference in the number of balls stored in the fourth storage area is erased. Note that the information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if RAM clear is executed.

In this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The difference number of balls stored in the second storage area is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300, switching sequentially in units of 1,000 balls. Ru. Specifically, on the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 72(A), for example, "bL36" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the previous normal base was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base three times ago was 38%.

Subsequently, on the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 72(E), for example, "cL20" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time is 20,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the difference in the number of balls between when the power was turned on last time (one time before) and when the power was turned off last time is "0". Note that if the total number of fired balls is greater than the total number of prized balls and the difference in the number of balls is smaller than "0", "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 72(G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on the second time before (two times ago) to when the power was turned off the second time before the previous time was 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before last (three times ago) to when the power was turned off two times before last was 48,000. Thereafter, FIGS. 72(A) to 72(H) are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the above-mentioned modification, each time the power is turned OFF and ON (re-energized), the measured difference number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference number of balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area is is now deleted. However, each time RAM clearing is executed, the measured difference number of balls may be shifted and stored, and the difference number of balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area may be deleted. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer determines that it is a predetermined time (for example, 9 a.m.), the measured difference number of balls is shifted and stored in the 4th (N) storage area. The difference in the number of balls may be deleted. Note that N described above can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more.

In the above-mentioned modification, as shown in FIG. 72, the display of the difference number of balls was automatically switched every 5 seconds on the 7-segment display 300. However, the display of the difference number of balls may be changed by operating a predetermined operating means, such as pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180. Further, the display of the normal base and the display of the difference number of balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operating means.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments, when the number of differential balls reaches 70,000 (predetermined number), the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation according to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 29(A). showed that. However, the presentation mode indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 29(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 70,000") or a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the panel lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53 indicates that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. It may be shown as follows. Furthermore, as the number of differential balls increases, it may be shown that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation by a presentation mode that changes in multiple stages.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 (reference number), the game may be stopped by the performance mode shown in FIG. 29(B). However, the presentation mode indicating a situation where the game may be stopped is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 29(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a situation in which the game may be stopped may be indicated by a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 80,000") or by a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53. good.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, a situation is shown in which the game cannot be executed by the performance mode shown in FIG. 28(A). However, the presentation mode indicating a situation in which a game cannot be executed is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 28(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "The game cannot be played" may be displayed on the display screen 50a, or a special sound (for example, "The game cannot be played") may be output from the speaker 52.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, even if RAM clearing is executed, the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c is not deleted. However, even if the information on the difference number of balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erase storage section) of the gaming RAM 104, and when the RAM clear is executed, the information on the difference number of balls is cleared. good. In other words, the conditions for resetting the difference number of balls include that RAM clearing is executed, or the reset condition for resetting the difference number of balls is only that RAM clearing is executed. Also good.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process related to the game (the process of steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 34). In addition, the firing control process for firing the game balls (processing in step S109, see FIG. 34) was also stopped. However, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the firing control process. However, in this case, even if the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game ball flows down the game area 6 by the player's rotation operation on the handle 72k. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible for the player to quickly understand the situation in which the game cannot be executed. For example, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the firing control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, at the timing when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game ball may still be flowing down the game area 6, and the game ball may enter the various prize openings and award the player a prize. There is a problem that balls can be applied. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible to ensure that prize balls are not awarded to the player after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of fired balls based on the detection of the discharge port sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors that detect winnings in various winning holes (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a), , the total number of balls fired may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end of the inner wall portion 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, the total The number of balls fired may be counted.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, when the number of differential balls reaches 70,000, the over-prize ball preview image KY is displayed as shown in FIG. 29(A). However, regardless of the difference in the number of balls, the game becomes unplayable under the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more in customer waiting performances, performances during jackpot games (e.g. ending performances), preview performances accompanying variable performances, etc. You may perform a performance that explains what will happen. This is because such an effect allows players and employees of the gaming parlor to be informed in advance that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a function to prevent over-winning balls.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, by storing information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of difference balls in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104, Even when RAM clearing is executed, the information on the total number of prize balls, the total number of fired balls, and the information on the difference number of balls are not deleted. However, by storing information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of differential balls in a nonvolatile storage means (for example, FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the gaming RAM 104, Even if RAM clearing is executed, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of difference balls may not be deleted.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, the number of differential balls is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the counting of the difference number of balls may start from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal gaming state). In this case, the negative difference in the number of balls (that is, the total number of balls fired) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference in the number of balls that triggers the over-winning ball prevention function to be the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls separately, and subtracts the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls. Then, I calculated the difference in the number of balls. However, the number of difference balls may be measured (counted) using only the difference ball counter for counting the number of difference balls. That is, each time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Furthermore, each time a game ball is fired (every time the ejection port sensor detects the ball), the value of the difference ball counter is subtracted. In this way, the number of differential balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. In this case, the value of the difference ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more without becoming negative. In this way, as described above, the difference in the number of balls that triggers the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function can be made substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the over-prize ball prevention function clears the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number-of-difference storage unit 107c (that is, the non-erasing clearing process ) It was explained that the operation is based on the fact that the difference number of balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls, becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number. However, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated in response to the value measured as the maximum number of differential balls (sometimes referred to as the maximum number of balls held, MY, etc.) reaching a predetermined reference number. In other words, the specific measurement number may be the maximum difference number of balls. Here, the maximum difference in the number of balls will be explained with reference to FIG. 73. FIGS. 73(A) to 73(C) respectively show an example of the change in the number of difference balls and an example of the maximum number of difference balls calculated according to the change in the number of difference balls.

FIG. 73(A) is an example in which after the first minimum difference ball number is recorded, the difference ball number changes without being updated. The minimum number of difference balls is the lowest value of the measured number of difference balls. Specifically, in FIG. 73(A), after the previous non-erasure clearing process was performed, the number of difference balls has been decreasing, and the lowest number of difference balls "-10000" is recorded at time tA1. There is. After that, although the number of difference balls increases and decreases, it does not decrease below the minimum number of difference balls at time tA1 and remains unchanged. Then, at time tA2, which is after time tA1, a peak of "70,000" in the number of balls is recorded. The peak of the number of difference balls is the highest value of the number of difference balls after the minimum number of difference balls is measured. The maximum number of differential balls MYA in the example of FIG. 73(A) is "80,000" which is the difference between the minimum number of differential balls "-10000" at time tA1 and the peak number of differential balls "70,000" at time tA2. .

In the example of FIG. 73(A), the minimum number of difference balls is updated multiple times in accordance with the decrease in the number of difference balls until time tA1, because the number of difference balls tends to decrease. However, after that, the minimum difference number of balls does not fall below the minimum difference ball number at time tA1, so the minimum difference ball number is not updated after time tA1.

FIG. 73(B) is an example in which the minimum number of difference balls is updated multiple times and the number of difference balls changes. In this example, after the previous non-erasure clearing process was performed, the first minimum difference ball number "-10000" is recorded at time tB1. Furthermore, at time tB4, the lowest number of difference balls "-20000" is recorded, which is smaller than the number of difference balls "-10000" at time tB1. Further, at time tB7, the lowest number of difference balls "-30000" which is smaller than the number of difference balls at time tB4 is recorded. Then, in the period from time tB1 to time tB4 in FIG. 73(B), a peak of "20000" in the number of differential balls is recorded at time tB2. Further, from time tB4 to time tB7, a peak of "0" in the number of differential balls is recorded at time tB5. Furthermore, at time tB8, which is after time tB7, a peak of "50,000" in the number of balls is recorded. The maximum difference number MYB in the example of FIG. 73(B) is "80000" which is the difference between the minimum difference number of balls "-30000" at time tB7 and the peak difference number of balls "50000" at time tB8. .

In addition, also in the example of FIG. 73(B), the minimum number of difference balls is updated multiple times according to the decrease in the number of difference balls until time tB1, because the number of difference balls tends to decrease. In addition, the minimum number of difference balls is smaller than the number of difference balls at time tB1, which is the previous minimum number of difference balls, between time tB3 and time tB4, and is on a decreasing trend. It has been updated multiple times as the number of differential balls decreases. Furthermore, the minimum number of difference balls is smaller than the number of difference balls at time tB4 which is the previous minimum number of difference balls between time tB6 and time tB7, and is on a decreasing trend. It has been updated multiple times as the number of differential balls decreases.

FIG. 73(C) is an example in which the difference in the number of balls changes to a negative value. In this example, after the previous non-erasure clearing process was performed, the first minimum difference ball number "-30000" is recorded at time tC1. Furthermore, at time tC4, the minimum number of difference balls "-50000" is recorded, which is smaller than the minimum number of difference balls "-30000" at time tC1. Then, in the period from time tC1 to time tC4 in FIG. 73(C), a peak of "-10000" in the number of differential balls is recorded at time tC2. Further, at time tC5, which is after time tC4, a peak of "-10000" in the number of balls is recorded. In the example of FIG. 73(C), the maximum number of difference balls MYC is "40000", which is the difference between the minimum number of difference balls "-50000" at time tC4 and the peak number of difference balls "-10000" at time tC5. be.

In addition, also in the example of FIG. 73(C), the minimum number of difference balls is updated multiple times in accordance with the decrease in the number of difference balls, because the number of difference balls tends to decrease until time tC1. In addition, the minimum number of difference balls is smaller than the number of difference balls at time tC1, which is the previous minimum number of difference balls, between time tC3 and time tC4, and is on a decreasing trend. It has been updated multiple times as the number of differential balls decreases.

As mentioned above, the maximum number of difference balls is determined by the difference between the minimum number of difference balls, which is the lowest value of the number of difference balls measured, and the peak (highest value) of the number of difference balls after the minimum number of difference balls is measured. Calculated. The over-winning ball prevention function can be activated when the difference between the minimum number of difference balls and the number of difference balls measured after the minimum number of difference balls is recorded reaches a predetermined reference number. can. In other words, the over-prize ball prevention function can be activated in response to the increase in the number of difference balls from the minimum number of difference balls reaching a predetermined reference number. Further, the over-winning ball prevention function can be activated in response to the maximum difference ball number reaching a predetermined reference number.

Specifically, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function stores the minimum number of difference balls in a predetermined storage area and calculates the difference between the stored minimum number of difference balls and the current (latest) number of difference balls. At the same time, it is conceivable to operate in response to the calculated value reaching a predetermined reference number. Information on the minimum number of difference balls and information on the calculated value of the difference between the minimum number of difference balls and the current number of difference balls can be stored in a predetermined storage area (non-erasable storage unit 107) of the gaming RAM 104. good. These values may be cleared (that is, set to initial values) when the difference in the number of balls is cleared in a predetermined non-erasing clearing process.

In addition, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated in response to the difference between the minimum difference ball number and the difference ball number measured after the minimum difference ball number is recorded reaching a predetermined reference number, That is, when the number of increases in the number of difference balls from the minimum number of difference balls is set as the specific measurement number, a counter may be provided to count the specific measurement number. Such a counter may, for example, always perform addition based on the number of prize balls regardless of the value, and perform subtraction based on the number of fired balls when the number is greater than "0". If the difference in the number of balls is "0" or less, no subtraction is performed based on the number of fired balls. The value of such a counter changes as an integer greater than or equal to "0". This counter may hereinafter be referred to as a difference ball natural number counter. Information on the difference ball natural number counter may also be stored in a predetermined storage area (non-erasable storage section 107) of the gaming RAM 104. Then, the value of the difference ball natural number counter is cleared (that is, set to the initial value) by a process equivalent to a predetermined non-erasure clearing process (processing that clears the difference ball number in the above embodiment). Bye.

An example of the change in the value of the difference ball natural number counter will be explained with reference to FIG. FIGS. 74(A) to 74(C) each show the change in the value of the difference ball natural number counter. The changes in the value of the difference ball natural number counter shown in FIGS. 74(A) to 74(C) respectively correspond to the changes in the difference ball number shown in FIGS. 73(A) to 73(C).

As shown in FIGS. 74(A) to 74(C), the value of the difference ball natural number counter becomes "0" while the minimum difference ball number is updated. The difference ball natural number counter can count the increase in the number of difference balls from the minimum difference ball number using a natural number. Therefore, by using the difference ball natural number counter, it is possible to properly function the over-prize ball prevention function. Furthermore, with the difference ball natural number counter that always changes at "0" or more, it is possible to calculate in an easy-to-understand manner the minimum value required for the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function. Moreover, when using a value less than "0", the amount of information related to calculation by the game control microcomputer 101 may increase. In such a case, the load on the game control microcomputer 101 can be reduced by using a difference ball natural number counter that always changes at "0" or more.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated on the condition that the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) is 80,000 (reference number) or more. However, the number of difference balls (reference number) that is the standard for the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is not limited to 80,000, but may be 50,000, 100,000, or 120,000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments, the specific measurement number that triggers the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function is the difference ball number, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. there were. However, from the viewpoint of not awarding excessive prize balls, the specific measurement number can be changed as appropriate as long as it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player. For example, the specific measured number may be the number of differential balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state or a certain period such as a consecutive game period. For example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. It's okay to have one. Further, for example, the specific measurement number may be based on all gaming states, limited to a certain gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, or limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the pachinko game machine PY1 has a non-enclosed ball that is ejected to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1 after the game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6. It was configured as a pachinko style. However, the pachinko game machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine in which game balls housed inside the machine can circulate and enter the game area again after flowing down the game area. In this case, a 7-segment display is arranged on a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170. Therefore, it may be possible to display the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) on this 7-segment display. There is also a 6-digit, 7-segment display at the bottom of the front door that displays the number of balls you have. Therefore, the number of difference balls (specific measurement number) may be displayed on this 6-digit 7-segment display. Note that "measurement" in this embodiment has the same meaning as counting or counting.

14. Inventions Shown in the Above Embodiments In the above embodiments, inventions of the following means are shown. In the explanation of the means described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention related to means A1 is:
A game control means (main control board 100) capable of controlling the game,
A performance execution means (performance control board 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to execute a first special game (type 1 jackpot game) in which the variable winning area changes to an open state,
During the execution of the first special game, if the game ball that entered the variable winning area further enters the specific area, a second special game (type 2 jackpot) will be executed following the execution of the first special game. games) can be executed,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
If the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), then the game is controlled to be unplayable,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a notification effect (passage possible notification effect) to notify that the game ball can enter the specific area,
If the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number due to prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the variable winning area in the first special game, if the specific measurement number does not reach the reference number; This gaming machine is characterized in that the notification effect is performed in a more conspicuous manner (special manner).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, the game becomes impossible to play after that. Therefore, if the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number in response to winning in the variable winning area in the first special game, and the game ball does not enter the specific area, the second special game will not be executed, Immediately after the first special game ends, there is a possibility that the specific measured number will exceed the reference number and the game will be controlled to be impossible to execute due to winnings in areas other than the specific area.

Therefore, when the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number due to the prize balls awarded in response to winning in the variable winning area in the first special game, the notification effect is displayed in a more conspicuous manner than when the reference number is not reached. Since this is carried out, it is possible to make the player aware of the passing of the game ball to the specific area by the notification effect. Therefore, the player can win the game ball in the variable winning area more reliably, and can make the specific measured number equal to or greater than the reference number in the first special game.

The invention related to means A2 is
The gaming machine according to means A1,
The game control means is
If the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number due to the prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the variable winning area in the first special game, the above-mentioned following the execution of the first special game. This gaming machine is characterized in that after the execution of the second special game, the game is controlled to be impossible to execute.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, even after the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number in the first special game, it is possible to continue to let the player enjoy at least the second special game.

<Means B>
The invention related to means B1 is
A game control means (main control board 100) capable of controlling the game,
A performance execution means (performance control board 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The game control means is
The variable winning area (second big winning opening 15) can be changed to an open state to execute a special game (jackpot game) in which a prize ball can be awarded to a player,
During execution of the special game, if the game ball that entered the variable winning area further enters the specific area (16), the control is changed to the first game state (high probability high base game state) after the special game ends. is possible, and if the game ball that entered the variable winning area does not enter the specific area, it is possible to control to a second gaming state (low probability high base gaming state) after the end of the special game,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
If the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), then the game is controlled to be unplayable,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute an entry notification effect (first notification effect) to notify that the game ball has entered the specific area,
If the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the special game in which the specific measurement number does not reach the reference number, the entry notification effect may be executed, while the specific measurement number does not reach the reference number. This gaming machine is characterized in that when a game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the special game, which is greater than or equal to the number of special games, the entry notification effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game cannot be executed after execution of the special game in which the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. Therefore, if a game ball enters a specific area during execution of such a special game and an entry notification effect is performed, the first game state will be advantageous even though the game becomes impossible to execute afterwards. This will make the player aware of this.

Therefore, if the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of a special game in which the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number, unlike the case when a special game is executed in which the specific measurement number does not reach the reference number, the game ball enters the specific area. Since the notification effect is not executed, the player is not made aware that the game will be in an advantageous gaming state before the game becomes impossible to play, and the player's feeling of regret is accelerated when the game becomes impossible to play. This can be prevented.

The invention related to means B2 is:
The gaming machine according to means B1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first gaming state is a gaming state in which it is more likely to be determined that the special game will be executed than the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the first gaming state is a gaming state in which it is more likely to be determined that a special game will be executed than the second gaming state, so that the special game is being executed in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number. When a game ball enters a specific area and an entry notification effect is performed, the game state becomes such that it is easy to determine that a special game will be executed, even though the game becomes impossible to execute after that, and further acquisition of special games is possible. This will make players expect.

Therefore, if the game ball enters a specific area during execution of a special game where the specific measured number is greater than or equal to the reference number, the entry notification effect will not be performed, so the special symbol will change to the special mode before the game becomes impossible to execute. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming conscious of the fact that the game state is likely to be stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from feeling disappointed when the game becomes impossible to play.

<Means C>
The invention related to means C1 is
A game control means (main control board 100) capable of controlling the game,
A performance execution means (performance control board 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state (high probability high base gaming state) and a second gaming state (low probability high base gaming state),
It is possible to execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
If the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), then the game is controlled to be unplayable,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The special games include a first special game (Jackpot Game 1, Jackpot Game 3) in which the game state after execution is set to the first game state,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a first advance notification effect (a special pattern variation effect in which the effect pattern is stopped and displayed at an odd number of zeros) that notifies that the first special game will be played;
When the first special game in which the specific measured number does not reach the reference number is played, the first advance notification effect may be performed;
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the first special game in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is played, the first advance notification performance is not performed.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game cannot be executed after the special game in which the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. Therefore, if such a special game is the first special game, the player will be made aware that the game will be in the advantageous first game state, even though the game will become impossible to execute after that. Become.

Therefore, when the first special game in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is played, unlike the case where the first special game is played in which the specific measured number does not reach the reference number, the first advance notification effect is executed. do not. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the game will be in an advantageous gaming state before the game becomes impossible to play, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed when the game becomes impossible to play. It is.

The invention related to means C2 is
The gaming machine according to means C1,
The special game includes a second special game (Jackpot Game 2, Jackpot Game 4) in which the game state after execution is set to the second game state,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a second advance notification performance (a special pattern fluctuation performance in which the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at an even number of doubles (a set of three)) that can notify that the second special game will be played;
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the second special game is played, the second advance notification performance is performed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second special game is to be played, the second advance notification effect is performed, so that by executing the second advance notification effect, the player is informed that the second special game will be executed. It is possible to make people aware of this.

The invention related to means C3 is:
The gaming machine according to means C2,
The performance execution means is
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a special manner, it is possible to stop and display the production symbol in a specific display manner (a manner in which it stops at a set of three),
The specific display modes include a first display mode (display mode with odd numbers of zeros) that suggests execution of the first special game, and a second display mode (display mode with even numbers) that suggests execution of the second special game. There are
When the second special game is played, before the execution of the second special game, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the second display mode as the second advance notification performance,
When the first special game in which the specific measured number does not reach the reference number is played, the performance symbols are stopped in the first display mode as the first advance notification performance before the execution of the first special game. There are times when it is displayed,
When the first special game in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is played, the performance symbols may be stopped and displayed in the second display mode before the execution of the first special game. This is a gaming machine with special features.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the first special game where the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is played, unlike when the first special game where the specific measured number does not reach the reference number is played, Before the execution of the first special game, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the second display mode in the same way as when the second special game is executed. Therefore, when the first special game in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is played, it is possible to more reliably prevent the player from being aware that an advantageous gaming state will be reached before the game becomes impossible to execute. .

The invention related to means C4 is
The gaming machine according to means C3,
The performance execution means is
The production design can be temporarily stopped and displayed before being stopped and displayed in the specific display mode,
When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the second display mode, it is possible to perform a mode change production (symbol change production in the first mode) that changes from the second display mode to the first display mode,
If the first special game in which the specific measured number does not reach the reference number is played after the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the second display mode, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the second display mode. After the display, the mode change effect may be performed, and then the first advance notification effect may be performed,
If the first special game in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is performed after the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the second display mode, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the second display mode. The game machine is characterized in that the mode change performance is not performed after the display, and the second advance notification performance is performed thereafter.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the first special game where the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is played, unlike when the first special game where the specific measured number does not reach the reference number is played, After the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the second display mode, the mode change performance is not performed, and the second advance notification performance is executed. Therefore, when the first special game in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is played, the second advance notification performance before the execution of the first special game will more reliably provide an advantage before the game becomes impossible to execute. It is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the fact that he or she will be in a strange gaming state.

The invention related to means C5 is:
a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
It is possible to execute special games that are advantageous to the player,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
If the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, then the game is controlled to be unplayable,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The special game includes a first special game in which the game state after execution is set to the first game state,
The performance execution means is
During execution of the special game, a special performance (promotion performance) with predetermined performance content can be executed,
The predetermined performance content includes a first performance content (success mode) that can suggest that the special game being executed is the first special game,
When the special performance is performed during execution of the first special game in which the specific measured number does not reach the reference number, the special performance of the first performance content may be performed;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the special performance is performed during execution of the first special game in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the special performance of the first performance content is not performed. It is.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the first special game in which the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number is being played, and when the first special game in which the specific measured number does not reach the reference number is being played, Unlike the above, since the special effect of the first effect is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the game will be in an advantageous gaming state before the game becomes impossible to execute, and when the game becomes impossible to execute. It is possible to prevent players from feeling disappointed.

The invention related to means C6 is
The gaming machine according to means C5,
The special game includes a second special game in which the game state after execution is set to the second game state,
The predetermined performance content includes a second performance content (failure mode) that suggests that the special game being executed is the second special game,
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the special performance is performed during execution of the second special game, the special performance of the second performance content is performed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second special game is played, the special performance of the second performance content is performed, so that the second special game is executed by executing the special performance of the second performance content. It is possible to make the player aware of the execution.

15...Second grand prize opening (variable prize area)
16...Specific area 100...Game control board (game control means)
101...Microcomputer for game control 120...Production control board (production execution means)
121... Production control microcomputer PY1... Pachinko game machine

Claims (2)

a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to execute a first special game in which the variable winning area changes to an open state,
During the execution of the first special game, if the game ball that has entered the variable winning area further enters the specific area, a second special game can be executed following the execution of the first special game. can be,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
If the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, then the game is controlled to be unplayable,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a notification effect to notify that a game ball can enter the specific area,
If the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number due to prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the variable winning area in the first special game, if the specific measurement number does not reach the reference number; A game machine characterized in that the notification effect is performed in a manner that is more conspicuous than the above. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The game control means is
If the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number due to the prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the variable winning area in the first special game, the above-mentioned following the execution of the first special game. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the game so that it cannot be executed after the execution of the second special game.

Images